JP2019162313A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of easily checking a board.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a board (e.g., game control board 650) capable of forming a conductor pattern (e.g., GND pattern 655, information display pattern 652) on a first surface (e.g., front surface) and a second surface (e.g., back surface) that is the back side of the first surface. The board includes an information display unit (e.g., an information display pattern 652) for displaying board information on the board, and forms the information display unit with a conductor pattern (e.g., information display pattern 652) that is independent of the peripheral conductor pattern (e.g., GND pattern 655).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 77

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  There is a gaming machine equipped with a control device that can efficiently perform visual inspection of a substrate.

JP 2012-95879 A

In the visual inspection of the substrate, confirmation of the substrate may be required.
In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a substrate can be easily confirmed.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine 10 includes a substrate on which a conductor pattern can be formed on a first surface and a second surface that is the back surface side of the first surface. The substrate includes an information display unit that displays substrate information about the substrate, and the information display unit is formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern.

  According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, it is easy to check the board.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the package display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 8 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the winning number counter area | region of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting port 1 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting port 2 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure pending | holding information determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the change start information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the change start information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability variation frequency update process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the process during special figure 2 fluctuation | variation of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the process during special figure 2 fluctuation | variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the process during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the process during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 display process of 1st Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows the flowchart of the external information edit process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the production | presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the attachment base which supports the game control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment, and a game control apparatus with a front frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the AA cross section of the game control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure (the 1) which shows an example of direction of the resistance mounted in the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and a game control board. It is the figure (the 2) which shows an example of direction of the resistance mounted in the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and a game control board. It is the figure (the 3) which shows an example of direction of the resistance mounted in the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and a game control board. It is the figure (the 4) which shows an example of direction of the resistance mounted in the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and a game control board. It is the figure (the 5) which shows an example of direction of the resistance mounted in the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and a game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display of the resistance mounted in the game control board of 2nd Embodiment, and a corresponding part number. It is a figure which shows an example of the components with which the component mounting surface of 2nd Embodiment is equipped. It is a figure which shows an example of direction of the resistance mounted in the game control board of the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment, and a game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control apparatus of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment, and an attachment base which supports a game control apparatus with a front frame. It is a figure which shows an example of direction of the resistance mounted in the game control board of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment, and a game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of direction of the resistance mounted in the game control board of the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment, and a game control board. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement | positioning relationship of the integrated circuit on the game control board of 3rd Embodiment, a connector, and resistance, and direction of resistance mounted in a game control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of line TL of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the component arrangement | positioning area | region and non-component arrangement | positioning area | region located between the integrated circuit and connector on the game control board of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the AA cross section of the game control apparatus of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is FIG. (1) which shows an example of the part number display of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows an example of the part number display of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the status display apparatus which is a display means of a base, and the storage area for bases. It is a figure which shows the example of a display by a status display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the surface of a game control board of 4th Embodiment, and a back surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 2 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 3 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the surface of a game control board of the modification 4 of 4th Embodiment, and a back surface. It is a figure which shows an example of how it looks at the time of observation of the game control board of the modification 4 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 5 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of how it looks at the time of observation of the game control board of the modification 6 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the surface of a game control board of the modification 7 of 4th Embodiment, and a back surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the surface of a game control board of the modification 8 of 4th Embodiment, and a back surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 8 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of how it looks at the time of observation of the game control board of the modification 8 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the surface of a game control board of the modification 9 of 4th Embodiment, and a back surface.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is an outer frame (support frame).
11 is attached so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are built-in lamps, LEDs, etc., decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, if a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in abnormal notification colors (for example, Frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing in red) and sound (
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound effects) is provided. further,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition,
A lamp for notifying the dispensing abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 and an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher are shown. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 that stores game balls that are paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the ball striking device, and the like. In addition, the upper plate 2
An option setting unit 25 is provided at the upper edge of 1 to allow the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25 are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25.
a is provided, and a determination button switch 25 b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets an effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 1
0 can produce an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. For example,
An effect in which a player's operation is intervened is an effect in a variable display game (decoration special figure variable display game) on a display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character to be displayed can be operated, and the identification information in the special display variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for discharging a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the game ball 32 supplied from the upper plate 21 by the ball striking device is used as a game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Launch towards (see Figure 2). Further, when the player operates the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, for example, the volume emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b can be set, or the brightness of the game board 30 can be set. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board according to the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is made of resin side cases 3 provided at the four corners of the game board 30.
3 and the guide rail 31 are enclosed. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 is disposed substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so that the game ball does not easily jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, the display screen includes an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image,
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

In addition, a board production device 44 is provided at the top of the center case 40 to produce a game by operating. This board effect device 44 is displayed from the state shown in FIG.
It is possible to operate toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition for the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball that has won the normal start gate 34 (a game ball passing through the normal start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning holes 3
5 is arranged on the right side below the center case 40 and on the right part of the special variable winning device 38, which will be described later. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Also, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 that forms a first start winning opening (start winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the usual start gate 34 and at the right side of the center case 40,
An ordinary variable winning device 37 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition for the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 (starting port 1) includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right. 37b has a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) that is normally almost vertical and in which a game ball cannot flow.
Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric fluctuation is caused by turning the upper end side to the right side by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. The game device can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The normal variation winning device 37 may be awarded even in the closed state, and it may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state. The normal variation winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (general power).

A downflow path 91 through which a game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variation winning apparatus 37, and game balls that have not won the normal variation winning apparatus 37 flow down through the downflow path 91. A start winning opening 92 is provided at the lower part of the flow path 91, and a guide portion 93 is provided below the flow path 91.
Is provided. The guiding portion 93 has an inclined surface with the upper surface 94 descending to the left. The guiding ball 93 receives a game ball that flows downward without receiving a prize at the start winning opening 92 and receives the left of the special variation winning device 38 to be described later. It comes to guide to the direction.

The start winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (start winning area) for giving a start condition for the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). The winning game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

Also, below the start winning opening 36 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game (
A lower prize opening, a big prize opening 1) 95 are provided. The special variable winning device 95 includes an opening / closing member 9.
5c, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening / closing member 9
The open / close member 95c is converted from the closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) into which the opening / closing member 95c can accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 95 is a large winning port 1 solenoid 9 as a driving device.
5b (see FIG. 3) is provided with a large winning opening (lower large winning opening, large winning opening 1) opened and closed by an opening / closing member 95c, and a small hit gaming state (second) according to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game. During the special gaming state, the game winning ball opening is converted from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of gaming balls into the winning game opening and giving a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. It is supposed to be. Note that a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the large winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .

Also, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (upper prize winning opening, big winning prize, which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. Mouth 2) 38 is provided. The special variation winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is closed (a disadvantage to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Open / close member 38c is retracted and converted to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) that can accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning port (upper large winning port, large winning port 2) opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c driven by a large winning port 2 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. During the big hit game state (first special game state) based on the results of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, or the small hit game state (second special game state) based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game During the game, by converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. ing. The inside of the grand prize opening (winning area)
Is provided with a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening.

In addition, when there are a plurality of big prize openings as in the present embodiment, one or two of the big prize opening switches 38a are provided for each, as a whole (see FIG. 3). In the case of the first embodiment, the special variable prize winning device 95 constituting the first special variable prize winning device (the lower prize winning opening, the big winning prize opening 1) is provided with only one big winning prize opening switch 38a. On the other hand, the special variable prize winning device 38 constituting the second special variable prize winning device (the upper prize winning opening, the big winning prize opening 2) is the big winning prize opening switch 38.
A plurality of (for example, two) a are arranged. The special variation winning device 95 is a winning device (so-called mini-attacker) having a small winning opening compared to the special variable winning device 38, for example.

A warp port (warp inlet) 39 a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part thereof is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp outlet 39b is located immediately above the start winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp outlet 39b
It becomes easy to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, among the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the start winning opening 36, the special variable winning device 95, the general winning port 35 (the right of the special variable winning device 38) (Excluding the general prize opening 35 in the club), and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning It is possible to aim for winning in the device 38 or the like.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are provided. Collective display device 50 that displays a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and various information
Is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs, a special figure 1 hold display part 52, a special figure 1 symbol display part 53, a special figure 2 symbol display part 54, and a universal symbol display part. 55, a general map hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, a game machine control system will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a control system for the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111. A CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a CPU
The data bus 140 etc. which connect between the part 110, the input part 120, and the output part 130 are comprised.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal resonator. The operating clock of the gaming microcomputer 111, a timer interrupt, and a reference for a random number generation circuit An oscillation circuit that generates a clock (
Crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are connected to a DC (Di
rect Current) DC voltage of a predetermined level such as 32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc. is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates the DC voltage of 32V from the AC power of 24V (AC (
Alternating Current)-DC converter and DC32V to DC12V, DC5V
The normal power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
10 and a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to a RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to notify is provided.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, Alternatively, it may be provided on the main substrate. Game board 30
Since the game control device 100 is subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is a game microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the gaming microcomputer 1.
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the computer 11. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control apparatus 100 is provided with a set value change switch 126 and a set key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch, and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. For example, the game control apparatus 100 can change the hit probability of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game according to the setting of six stages.

The gaming control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting change mode in which the setting of the gaming machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power when the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 allows the setting 1 to the setting 6 to be changed cyclically by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting content on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying a set value. For example, the one-digit 7-segment LE is displayed.
D and mounted on the substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the gaming machine 10 can be confirmed by turning on the power when the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. . For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting content on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
M111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (program, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A or the storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Used as ROM111B or R
As the AM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table refers to the fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3 stored as start-up memory by the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining a variation pattern with reference to FIG. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.).
, A table for determining a first half variation pattern that is a variation pattern before reaching the reach state (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the display result that is derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state where so-called full rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state where the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the change mode is stopped and displayed in the order of left, right, and in order to display the result mode, the left and right change display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas among the left, middle, and right (for example, the same The state that is the identification information (except for the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of “no reach” <“normal reach” <“special 1 reach” <“special 2 reach” <“special 3 reach” <“premier reach”. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. The entire 10 is controlled. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113
And a clock generator for generating a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal for a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111A determines that the ROM 111B
One of the variation pattern tables is acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc., and selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. Get. Where CP
U111A serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the gaming machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Is controlled to drive out the prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10,
Control to pay out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, a start port 1 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, a start port 2 switch 92a in the start winning port 92, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, a winning port switch 35a,
Connected to the big prize opening switch 38a of the special variable prize winning device 38, a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is inputted, and 0V-
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for converting to a 5V positive logic signal is provided. The proximity I / F 121 also receives a detection signal of a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. An abnormal state such as a floating state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

The winning opening switch 35a will be described. In FIG.
Although shown as a single block, in actuality, a plurality (N) of prize opening switches 35a (three in this embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are close to each other by different signal lines. I
/ F121 is input. In FIG. 3, the big winning opening switch 38a is shown as one block. However, in actuality, a plurality (X) of big winning opening switches 38a (3 in this embodiment) are used.
Are provided on the game board 30. The plurality of big prize opening switches 38a are
Each is connected by a different signal line or, for example, a switch and the game control device 10
It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR on a relay board (not shown) existing between 0 (main board). The board radio wave sensor 62 and a magnetic sensor 61 described later may be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be connected to the game control device 100 in a similar manner by a wired OR method.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F
Among the outputs of 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. The signal output (output from the proximity I / F 121) of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the start port switches of FIG. 1, is shown by one signal line in FIG. There are two.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. In addition, the third input port 124 includes a detection signal of a fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, detection signal of the set value change switch 126, detection signal of the setting key switch 127, RAM initial The detection signal of the control switch 112 is input.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. Yes.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is asserted (to an effective level) by enabling the gaming microcomputer 111 to decode an address assigned to the second input port 123 and thereby omit an unillustrated enable signal CE (Chip Enable). Can be read out. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) Based signal), an out-ball detection switch signal (a signal output when an out-ball is detected) The first input port 122 is provided for supplying the emissions 111.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor every time an out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in a discharge channel (not shown) between a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the gaming machine 10 and the out port 30a. Out ball detection switch signal is a game performance per predetermined operation (for example, 60,000 out balls) (for example,
The calculated gaming performance is displayed on the state display device 135. The out-sphere detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300.
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determination of an operation state that becomes a trigger for switching to a game effect or a customer waiting screen display. For example, the status display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the game performance by a decimal number or a hexadecimal number.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration, and a detection signal of the vibration sensor switch may be input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function of removing noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. Is configured to do. Also,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication that prevents signals from being input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 receives data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization that is connected to the data bus 140 and a signal indicating the probability status of the jackpot via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch that does not require any processing, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 is connected to the gaming microcomputer 11.
A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and a signal of a port selected and controlled by this chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b that opens and closes the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning apparatus 38 (large winning opening), and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning apparatus 37. A first output port 134a is provided for outputting open / close data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c for opening and closing and display data of the status display device 135. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 136. The output unit 130 includes a collective display device 5.
ON / OFF of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed in 0
A third output port 134c for outputting off data and a fourth output port 134d for outputting on / off data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information on the external information terminal board 71.
A fifth output port 134e is provided for output to the. The external information terminal board 71 includes
A photo relay is provided, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. Can be supplied to. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134 e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the big prize solenoid 38b and the general solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 134c, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 134d. A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fifth output port 1
34e and the fourth output port 134d, a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71, and display data of the status display device 135 that is output from the first output port 134a A fifth driver 138e that receives the signal and generates and outputs a drive signal for the state display device 135 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
You may make it provide in the output part 130 of the game control apparatus 100, ie, the relay board | substrate 70 side instead of the main board | substrate. Further, the state display device 135 or the fifth driver 138e and the state display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external substrate (not shown) side instead of the main substrate. .

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 490. Photocoupler 139
The game microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 through serial communication. In addition, such transmission and reception of data
Since it is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same way as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The production control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
And a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 31 that controls the output of sound in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
4 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program executed by the CPU and various data stored therein.
PROM 321 composed of ROM (programmable read only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, FeRAM that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure (
Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that is a clocking means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311 a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command (production command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, instructs the VDP 312 about the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound, and the decoration lamp. Lighting, motor and solenoid drive control,
Processing such as management of production time is executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 that is used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS for giving data transmission timing is input. VDP 312
To the main control microcomputer 311, a wait time for notifying the waiting state of the reception of commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT 0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. From the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSY
The NC and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

The sound source LSI 314 is connected to an audio ROM 327 that stores audio data.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal I is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (center case 40) A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. Good.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a determination button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect agent switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. The function of detecting the on / off state of 47 (production motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, or the production control device 300
Is provided with a switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the main control microcomputer 311 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled thereby, DC 32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12V for driving a motor or LED, DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I / F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15 V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC 3.3 V based on DC 5 V is used.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2 V are provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. The VDP 312 (VDRESET signal) and the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
Also supplied to the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

It should be noted that the setting in the gaming machine 10 may be performed as follows to prevent fraud prevention.
(1) The game control device 100 uses the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 when the setting is changed.
And the process which forcibly initializes the information memorize | stored in RAM in the payout control apparatus 200 is performed. This prevents the gaming machine 10 from performing game control across different setting values.

(2) The game control device 100 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 when the setting is changed and when the setting is confirmed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify an external connection device (for example, an information disclosure device such as a hall computer or a call lamp) that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. The externally connected device that has received the security signal can notify that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed by notifying means (such as a lamp or sound (including sound)). Note that the game control apparatus 100 may output a common security signal for setting change and setting confirmation, or may output a security signal that can distinguish between setting change and setting confirmation.

(3) The game control device 100 is accommodated in the board box and attached to the back side of the front frame 12. The game control device 100 is protected by a sealed substrate box except that required operation units (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), various connectors, and the like face the outside. As a result, the main medium (game microcomputer 111 and the like) that is a trigger for changing the setting or checking the settings is protected by the sealed substrate box. In addition, the game control device 100 faces the setting key switch 127 to the outside, and a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) other than the setting key switch 127 is sealed by a substrate box. It may be protected.

(4) The game control device 100 does not have a setting key by requiring the operation of the setting key switch 127 to access a main medium (such as the gaming microcomputer 111) that becomes a trigger for changing the setting or checking the setting. Eliminate third party access to main media. The game control device 1
00 may be configured to allow access to a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) by operating the setting key switch 127. For example, the game control device 100 may be configured to allow physical operation to the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 by operating the setting key switch 127 (for example, opening / closing of an operation window) or setting. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the set value change switch 126 may be electrically or logically enabled by the operation of the key switch 127, or may be a combination of these.

(5) The game control device 100 includes a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), and a required information display unit (status display device 135).
The probability setting value display device 136) is controlled by the gaming microcomputer 111. Note that the game control device 100 may include an error release switch used for error release and a game start switch for giving a game start opportunity, and the error release switch and the game start switch are also controlled by the game microcomputer 111. It may be.

(6) The game control device 100 includes a RAM initialization switch 112 and a setting key switch 127.
Four power-on states are determined from the combinations of the input states. The game control device 100 is a RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the setting value can be changed. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the setting value can be confirmed. Setting confirmation state, RAM initialization switch 112 is ON
When the setting key switch 127 is off, the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the information stored in the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized to a RAM clear (RWM clear) state, and the RAM is initialized. When the switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, a power failure recovery (recovery) state where the power is turned on is set.

(7) The gaming machine 10 can change the setting in the following steps in the setting change state. A setting key is inserted when the setting key switch 127 is OFF with the power OFF (Step 1). Operate the setting key (for example, turn it) and set key switch 1
27 is switched to the ON state (step 2). Depressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 (
When the power is turned on (power switch ON), the setting is changed (
Step 3). In the setting change state, the setting value is changed every time the setting value change switch 126 is pressed (step 4). By operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state, the setting value is confirmed and the setting change state is ended (
Step 5).

At this time, the notification means (for example, display by the display device 41, sound (sound) by the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46) causes steps 3 and 4.
The setting change is notified at, and the RAM clear is notified at step 5. External information output means (
For example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs a security signal in steps 3 and 4, and stops outputting the security signal in step 5. Note that the game control device 100 performs step 5.
Prior to the RAM clear notification, the RAM clear is executed in step 3. That is,
The game control device 100 prioritizes the setting change notification over the RAM clear notification, thereby promptly performing the setting value change notification to improve the effect as a countermeasure against fraud. Further, the probability set value display device 136 is turned off in steps 1 and 2, the set value is displayed in steps 3 and 4, and is turned off in step 5. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in Steps 1 to 4 and Step 5 is displayed.
To display the base value. In the gaming machine 10, the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 may be provided integrally. For example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability setting value display device 136. In that case, the status display device 135 performs steps 1 and 2.
The setting value is displayed in steps 3 and 4, and the base value is displayed in step 5. In addition,
The game state of the game control device 100 is before the game is started at steps 3 and 4, the game is started at step 5, and thereafter the game is in progress.

(8) The gaming machine 10 can perform setting confirmation in the following steps in the setting confirmation state. A setting key is inserted when the setting key switch 127 is OFF with the power OFF (Step 1). Operate the setting key (for example, turn it) and set key switch 1
27 is switched to the ON state (step 2). By turning on the power (turning on the power switch) without pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (OFF), the setting confirmation state is entered (step 3). The setting confirmation state is terminated by operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state (step 4).

At this time, the setting confirmation is notified in step 3 by notification means (for example, display by the display device 41, sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46). The external information output means (for example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs a security signal in step 3 and stops outputting the security signal in step 4.
The probability setting value display device 136 is turned off at steps 1 and 2, the set value is displayed at step 3, and turned off at step 4. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 3,
In step 4, the base value is displayed. In the gaming machine 10, the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 may be provided integrally. For example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability setting value display device 136. In this case, the status display device 135 is turned off at steps 1 and 2, the set value is displayed at step 3, and the base value is displayed at step 4.
Note that the gaming state of the game control device 100 is before the game is started in step 3, the game is started in step 4, and the game is in progress thereafter.

Note that the gaming machine 10 can perform setting changes and setting confirmations only before the game starts when the power is turned on. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the setting change or setting confirmation during the game,
The operation guarantee during the game is made easy.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the usual start gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in FIG. 4, the random number value for the hit determination of the normal figure is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. A process of determining a hit error is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the universal symbol display unit 55 of the collective display device 50, a process for displaying a universal symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first per stop symbol to the third per stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display unit 55, and the general electric solenoid 37c. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the usual figure change display game is out of place, the normal symbol display unit 55 performs control to display the result form of the deviation.

Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning port 36 and the start port 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, the start win (
Start memory), and based on this start memory, the jackpot determination random number value of the first special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. A process of determining a hit error is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 92a provided in the start winning opening 92, and the big hit judgment disturbance of the second special figure variation display game is based on the start memory. ROM111 is extracted from the numerical value
Compared with the determination value stored in B, a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (production control command, production command) including the determination results of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game to the production control device 300. To do. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, a process of displaying a special symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 has a start winning area for the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (start winning prize port 36, normal variation winning prize device 37,
The game control means controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning in the starting winning opening 92).

In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs setting of the effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode or the small hit result mode in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. And a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special game state due to the result of the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, a special prize winning device 2 solenoid 38b for the special fluctuation prize winning device. The control is performed so that the open / close members 38c of the 38 are opened to allow the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening 2. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A, for example, either receives a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls in the grand prize opening 2 or passes a predetermined openable time from the opening of the grand prize opening 2. Opening the special winning opening 2 until the condition is achieved is defined as one round, and this is repeated (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (cycle game). Further, in the process of generating the small hit game state due to the result of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) having been a small hit, the CPU 111A, for example, uses the big prize opening 1 solenoid 95b. The opening / closing member 95c of the special variation winning device 95 is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening 1. Further, in the process of generating the small hit gaming state due to the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) being the small hit, the CPU 111A, for example, by the big winning opening 2 solenoid 38b The opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning port 2. In addition, the opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the big prize opening performed in the small hit gaming state is 150 operations for maintaining the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 milliseconds, for example.
For example, it is performed four times at intervals of 0 milliseconds. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a big prize opening / closing control means for performing control to open / close the big prize opening when the stop result form becomes the special result form. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of place, the CPU 111A
The special figure 1 symbol display part 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display part 54 of the collective display device 50 are controlled to display the result of the deviation.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is
The probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state.
Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-short state (a specific game state, a normal figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on a result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed such that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal probability is set to “0” so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 600 milliseconds. When the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being the winning result, the opening time of the first per-stop symbol (opening time of the normal train) and the number of times of opening (for example,
500 msec x 1), 2nd stop symbol open time (general power open time) and number of open times (eg 1700 msec x 2 times), 3rd stop symbol open time (general power open time) and open Times (
For example, it can be set to be 1700 milliseconds × 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the normal map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal variable prize winning game 37 and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the general map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game so as to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 70
4 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 milliseconds is 1352 milliseconds). Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) as the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example, 1 /
251) and a higher probability (usually a high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of times of normal power release, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously, or only one of them can be generated. Also, the short-running state is the normal power support status (current power support or power support)
It can also be called.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game control device 100 is configured to display the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation) after the time-short state generated by a predetermined jackpot (after the electric support is finished). Special figure 2 special mode that increases the probability that the result of the display game) will be a small hit, for example, for a specified period
It is possible to generate a specific result high probability state that increases the probability that the second special figure variation display game will have a specific result. This special figure 2 special mode is a kind of high probability state.

Next, the outline of the game characteristic (standard strategy) of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming nature of this gaming machine 10 is that in the normal gaming state (the above-mentioned special figure 2 special mode, special gaming state, or short-time state), left-handed and a special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit Aim, right-handed in special gaming state (big hit state) and short-time state (during electric support), right-handed in special figure 2 special mode, aiming for small hits of special figure 2 variable display game, special gaming state and short-time state Or, when the special figure 2 special mode is ended and the normal gaming state is reached, the game is returned to the left hand. In addition, by providing the above-mentioned special figure 2 special mode, the player may be able to play a game while maintaining a higher expectation than the normal gaming state even after the completion of the short-time state, thereby improving the interest of the game. To do.

Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the collective display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 7 segment LED_d1, 7 segment LED_d2, and 16 LEs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
D is provided. The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d.
2 and various states are displayed according to the lighting modes of LED_d3 to LED_d18.

The collective display device 50 distributes various state display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display part 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display part 53 are arranged. A special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54, a general symbol display unit 55, a general symbol hold display unit 56, a state display unit 57, and a special symbol 2 hold display unit 58. The round display unit 51 includes four LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special game is displayed according to the lighting mode. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game by lighting the two LEDs LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display part 53 has 8 L of 7 segment LED_d1.
The symbols in the special figure 1 game are displayed by lighting the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by lighting the eight LEDs of the seven segment LED_d2 (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED). The regular symbol display unit 55 displays symbols in the regular symbol game by lighting the three LEDs LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The usual figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of holds in the usual figure game by lighting the two LEDs LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 includes LED_d7, LE
The gaming state in the special game is displayed by lighting the three LEDs D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game by lighting the two LEDs LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 8 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the main process according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the main process according to the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7, first, a stack pointer that sets a stack pointer that is a start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt is generated after a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed. A setting process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and R is assigned to a predetermined register (for example, D register).
The upper address of the AM head address is set (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper range is 00h.
Or take 01h. In step S4, 00h at the head of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5).
. The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6),
Processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, slave control means (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

When the power-on delay timer is timed, the validity of the data held in the RAM area is determined (
This is performed using a storage area that is not subject to checksum calculation (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be performed. It can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or until the standby time elapses after the power is turned on. 11
2 need to continue to operate. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if such annoying operation is not performed, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on Can be prevented from being accepted.

Next, a process for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7)
After performing the above, the process of monitoring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). First, a power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8). A determination is made (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10).
. If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S1)
0; N) is returned to the determination (step S9) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y),
In other words, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the gaming machine 10 to be powered off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with malfunctions at power-on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shut-off are retained.
There is no need to perform backup processing when a power failure occurs. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to take a backup of the RAM 111C, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value is “0”. ] Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is “0” (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, the RAM 111C
Permission is granted to read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) such as EEPROM or EEPROM (step S13), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port preinstalled in the gaming microcomputer 111,
In this first embodiment, the communication control device 300 and the payout control device 200 are used for communication (step S15), and the value of the power failure inspection region 1 in the RWM is normal. For example, it is determined whether or not 5Ah) (step S16).

If the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17) If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S17; Y
), A checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power-off (step S19).

Here, in the checksum calculation processing performed in step S18 and step S43 described later, the sum of the game control work area data and the status display work area data may be calculated as the checksum. The checksum may be calculated separately from the work area data and the status display work area data, or the checksum may be calculated only from the game control work area data. Game control work area is RW
It is a work area used for game control among the storage areas in M. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, if the checksums match (step S19; Y), it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (
Step S20) When the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (Step S20; N)
) Goes to step S25 (FIG. 7), and performs processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or the checksum is not normal (step S1).
9: If it is determined as N), the process proceeds to step S21, and initialization processing (first initialization processing) at the time of data abnormality is performed in steps S21 to S24. That is, the game control device 10
0 is data stored in the RWM based on the determination that the data in the RWM (eg, the RAM 111C) is abnormal (data in all areas including the access prohibited area)
Is a first initialization means for initializing.

When the process proceeds to step S21, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S21), and all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared to zero (step S22). ), The RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S23). Next, in the area to be initialized, RAM
The initial value at the time of initialization is saved (step S24), and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area having a value other than the value (zero) written in step S22 in the game control work area and the state display work area as an initial value. This is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration and the setting of the production mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), and initialization processing (first operation) is performed in steps S27 and S28. 2 initialization processing). That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 stores data stored in the RWM (for example, RAM 111C) based on the operation of the initialization operation unit ( A second initialization means for initializing data in an area not including the access-prohibited area.

When the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), the RWM (for example, the RAM 111)
C) The game control work area data in the storage area (area not including the access prohibition area) is cleared to zero (step S27), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27). S28), the process proceeds to step S29. In this embodiment, the area to be initialized is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration and the setting of the production mode.

As described above, the game control device 100 according to the first embodiment performs initialization processing (when data is abnormal) (
Since it has a function (first initialization means, second initialization means) for performing distinction between the first initialization process) and the initialization process (second initialization process) at the time of the initialization operation, It is possible to realize an initialization process that is optimal and lean.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S25) and is set in a special figure status (a special figure status area described later). The command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the state indicated by the data)
It transmits to the production control device 300) (step S26), and proceeds to step S31.

Here, the areas to be initialized in step S25 are areas related to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and error fraud monitoring. In step S25, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. This is an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

In the case of the first embodiment, in step S26, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information are transmitted. Note that the screen designation command means that the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both in normal processing (fluctuating, big hit (first special game state), small hit (first special game state) 2 is a command for instructing display of a customer waiting demo screen, and a command for instructing display of a recovery screen in other cases.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S24 or S28 to step S29, a command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S29).
The process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and A plurality of commands such as time (for example, a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound) are transmitted.
Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

In step S31, a CT that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is generated.
A process for starting the C circuit is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and the CPU 1 based on the divided signal.
11A includes a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Done by A. In addition, the hardware random number generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit (
Here, a bit transposition pattern of jackpot random number) is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that defines how to replace the extracted random bit arrangement (arrangement before bit transposition) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition). is there. By replacing the bits of the random numbers according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After that, a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on (soft random number registers 1 to n)
The initial value (start in the case of the first embodiment) of the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, hit initial value random number, hit symbol initial value random number) Value) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), and an interrupt is permitted (step S34).

Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines the big hit symbol stop symbol of the special figure, and the “small bonus symbol initial value random number” is the special symbol small hit symbol stop It is a random number that is the initial value of a random number (small per-spot design random number) that determines the design. Also, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal variation game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” determines the win symbol of the normal variation game. It is a random number that is the initial value of a random number (per symbol random number). The small hit design random number does not exist in a model without small hits, and the hit design initial value random number may not exist depending on the model.

Further, the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. By setting the value to (start value), the regularity of random numbers generated by software can be broken, and it is difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and destroy the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number, for example, by “+1”. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to update the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. Configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, CTC output that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit (CTC of timer interrupt processing (CT
C0) is a “low speed counter” updated based on another CTC (CTC2)).
In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number is “+1” or “−1”.
Or a random update in which all values within the range appear in a discrete manner until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit bonus random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, twice)
Is set (step S36), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process, and when such a method is adopted, In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S).
38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is ON. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (Step S38;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39) and processing for outputting off data to all output ports (step S40) are performed.

Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42).
Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off (step S43), and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44).
) Is performed, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM (step S45) is performed, and then waiting for the power supply of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for comprehensively controlling the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, which performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means.
In the gaming machine provided with the production control device 300 and the like, the main control means waits for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the sub control device when the power is turned on. Means (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

The main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit And the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs during the period from when the interrupt is permitted until the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39) in the main process described above. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
21). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S123) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning port 1 solenoid 95b, large winning port 2 solenoid 38b, general power solenoid 37c) and the like (step S124). ). In addition, when the signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main process, the output permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating a launch permission state viewed from the payout control device 200.
Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S125) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200, a random number update process 1 (step S126),
Random number update processing 2 (step S127) is performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the initial value (start value) of the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. . The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.

Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, and an error is detected. A prize opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened, etc.) is performed. Also, a start port switch monitoring process (step S129) for monitoring winnings of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a, a special figure 1 game process (step S130a) for performing a process related to the special figure 1 variation display game, A special figure 2 game process (step S130b) for performing a process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and a general figure game process (step S130c) for performing a process related to the general figure variable display game are performed.

It should be noted that in the start port switch monitoring process, if there is a game ball winning at the start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the first start winning port, or the start winning port 92 that forms the second start winning port, various random numbers are given. (A big hit random number, etc.) is extracted, and a game result preliminary determination is performed in advance to determine a game result based on the winning in a stage before the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, segment LEDs (for example, LEs such as the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50) provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying various information related to display of special figure variation display games and games.
D) Segment LED editing process for driving to display desired contents (step S13)
1) Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step S132) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. A board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) for performing the process is performed. Then, external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (step S134), status display editing output processing for status display (step S1)
35) to complete the timer interrupt process.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) are interrupted. Automatically performed on return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a payout command transmission process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the structure of the winning number counter area according to the first embodiment.

First, an example of the winning number counter area will be described. The winning number counter area 1 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, a three-ball prize counter, a ten-ball prize counter, and a 14-ball prize counter. The winning number counter can store up to 65535 winnings. Next, as shown in FIG. 10, for example, the winning number counter area 2 is composed of three prize ball counters, ten prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters, and each winning number counter can store up to 255 winning prizes. It has become. In the check of the count number of the winning number counter area, the above-mentioned counters are sequentially checked from the top (from the three winning ball counters) by updating the address of the winning number counter area in step S202 and the like which will be described later.

Next, in FIG. 9, the left column is a process for updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the right column is a process for transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described with reference to FIG. 10, the counters of a plurality of winning number counter areas 2 provided for each number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and 14 prize balls). Among these, it is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the counter to be checked (step S201). If there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the checking of the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 is completed. Whether or not (step S203).

If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count (step S201; Y),
The count number of the counter of the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted ("-1" is updated) (step S204), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 (for example, three, ten, Any one of 14 is acquired (step S205). Next, the value in the prize ball remaining area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). In step S209, the subtraction result is “0”.
”Or more (step S209; Y), the number of times of main prize ball signal output is“ +1 ”.
Update (step S210) and save the subtraction result in the award ball remaining number area (step S211)
).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, a process of outputting the main prize ball signal based on the number of main prize ball signal outputs updated in step S210 is performed. Here, as a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), as a main board (game control device 1)
00), one pulse is output for every 10 payout schedules, and the payout board (payout control device 200).
), One pulse is output for every 10 dispensed items.

Next, in the determination in step S203, all checks are completed (step S203;
Y), or if it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is not equal to or greater than “0” (step S209; N), the payout command transmission timer is not “0”. Is updated by "-1" (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set, so the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0”. Therefore, no subtraction is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213).
), When it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213; Y), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions that the payout busy signal is turned on (busy) are as follows: “Payout operation”, “Ball lending operation”, “Shoot ball breakage error”, “Overflow error”, “Frame radio wave fraud "In", "Dispensing ball detection switch is abnormal (switch that monitors the dispensed ball)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excessive payout error", "Prize to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of game balls remaining) (when not = 0).

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215), and the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 is determined. If there is no count (step S215; N), the address of the winning counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not all areas have been checked (step S217). If all areas have not been checked (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, if there is a count in the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by “−1” (step S2).
18) The payout number command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S2).
20). Then, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

In step S213, the value of the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S213).
213; N), if it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y), in step S217, all areas have been checked (step S217). ; Y), or when the process of step S221 ends, the payout command transmission process ends.

Note that, depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command is not transmitted at every timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses, as can be seen from the configuration in which the process is terminated without executing step S215 and the subsequent steps. I've been sending it. In addition, the payout command is transmitted under the condition that the payout control board can pay out the winning ball.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 8) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this winning prize switch / status monitoring process,
The winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the count switch is input) corresponding to the two large winning opening switches 38a (count switch) in the upper winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) The data indicating the bit position in the port of the signal is stored) (step S271). Next, a fraud & winning monitoring process (step S272) is performed to monitor whether there are frauds (illegal prizes) to be awarded to the big prize opening even though the big prize opening is not open, and to detect normal winnings. .

After that, a winning mouth monitoring table 2 corresponding to one large winning mouth switch 38a in the lower big winning mouth (special variable winning device 95) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and normal. A fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S274) for detecting a prize is executed.
Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S275a), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and an illegal & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning ( Step S275b) is executed.

Next, a prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring processing, that is, a prize opening switch that can always be awarded (
Here, a winning opening monitoring table for the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is prepared (step S276), and a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (step S277). ) And the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (step S278).

Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for the error state of the gaming machine 10 is the current monitoring target is “0”. To “3” (step S279). Thereafter, according to the value of the state scan counter, any one of a switch abnormality 1 error output due to occurrence of a switch connector disconnection, a shot ball break error from the dispensing control device 200, an overflow error from the overflow switch, and a dispensing abnormality error A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared for setting the error monitoring based on the crab (step S280).
). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, according to the value of the state scan counter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting an error monitoring based on any of the glass frame opening, the body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud and the touch switch. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S284).
If the value of the state scan counter is not “0” (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next
This is a case where there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine state. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like according to the value of the state scan counter The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the game as a target is prepared (step S285).
. Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S
286) is performed, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so the monitoring is performed with a period of 16 ms.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process in the above-described timer interrupt process (step S129)
Details will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (start winning port 36, normal variation winning device 3).
7) is prepared (step A101), hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the start port 1 (step A103).
).

When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the start port 1 (step A103;
In N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the start port 1 (step A1).
03; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be right-handed (for example, a normal power support state, a big hit, etc.) (step A104).

When it is determined in step A104 that the predetermined state is not to be right-handed (step A10)
4; In N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the predetermined state should be right-handed (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106). To do. That is, the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment
In the case of 0, except for the ordinary power support state, the start port 1 is hardly left if it is not left-handed, and when the start port 1 has won in a predetermined state to be right-handed, it is a predetermined state to be right-handed. Therefore, it is configured that the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the notification control device 300 performs a notification (warning) instructing to make a right strike.

Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the start port 1 (step A10)
7) Special map start port 1 switch processing (step A108) is performed.
Next, a winning monitoring table for the starting port 2 (starting winning port 92) is prepared (step A109).
Then, a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the start port 2 (step A111).

When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the start port 2 (step A111;
In N), the start port switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the start port 2 (step A1).
11; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the ordinary power support state (short-time state) (step A112). If it is determined that the gaming state is not in the ordinary power support state (step A112; N), It is determined whether or not there is (step A113). If it is determined in step A113 that the game is not a big hit (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is in the final change of the electric power support (step A114).

If it is determined in step A114 that the power transmission support final change is not in progress (step A114; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and an effect command setting process (step A116) is performed. That is, if it is not in the normal power support state, the big hit, or the final change of the general power support, it should be left-handed, so the left-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

If it is determined in step A112 that the power transmission support state is set (step A112; Y), or if it is determined in step A113 that a big hit is made (step A113; Y), the power transmission support is final in step A114. If it is determined that the process is changing (step A114; Y), the process proceeds to step A117 when the process of step A116 is completed.

When the process proceeds to step A117, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step A117), then the special start port 2 switch process (step A118) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

If it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the start port 2, for example, before executing step A112, the power train is fraudulent (regardless of the fact that the normal variable winning device 37 is closed) There is provided a step for determining whether or not there has been a fraud in which a winning to the variable winning device 37 is detected. If it is determined that the normal power fraud has occurred, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 and the subsequent steps. The configuration may be such that if there is a fraudulent power transmission, the second start memory (start memory in FIG. 2) may not be generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (step A102 in the above-described start-port switch monitoring process)
, A110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, ordinary variable winning device 37)
Among the start ports 2 (start winning ports 92), information on no winning of the start port to be monitored is set (step A121), and the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a are set.
Among these, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122).
. Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123).
Then, it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124).
).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125).
). Then, among the start port 1 and the start port 2, the winning presence information of the start port to be monitored is set (step A 126), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, the special start port 1 switch process in the start port switch monitoring process described above (step A
108) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure start port 1 switch process according to the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 1 switch process is a process that is performed when there is an input from the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (start prize of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the start port signal 1 output which is the number of times information relating to the number of winnings to the monitored start port 1 switches 36a, 37a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (step A1).
33). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output number area (step A134), and step A1.
The process proceeds to 35. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133;
In Y), step A134 is passed and the process proceeds to step A135. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal 1 output count area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” when “+1” is updated, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 holding number (the number of stored start figures of special figure 1) to be updated corresponding to the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored is less than an upper limit (for example, less than four) (Step A135). If the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135)
N) terminates the special figure start port 1 switch process. When the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), a special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting a prefetch fluctuation pattern) is set ( In step A136), the special figure 1 suspension number to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A137).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the RWM big hit random number storage area. (Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of special figure 1 is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit design random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit design random number storage area of the RWM (step A142), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are stored. The corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area is saved (step A143), and special figure hold information determination processing (step A144) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the monitored special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A145).
An effect command setting process (step A146) is performed, and the special figure starting port 1 switch process is terminated.

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable display game. The start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as the upper limit as the start storage serving as the right to execute the. Further, the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) performs a first start with various random numbers extracted based on winning of game balls to the start opening 1 (start winning opening 36, normal variable winning apparatus 37) up to a predetermined number. Memorize as memory.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A) in the start port switch monitoring process described above.
Details of 118) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch process according to the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 2 switch process is a process that is performed when there is an input to the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (start winning prize in the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 2 switch process, first, the start port signal 2 output count, which is the number of times information related to the number of wins to the start port 2 switch 92a, is output to the management device external to the gaming machine 10 is loaded ( In step A151), the loaded value is updated by “+1” (step A152).
), It is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step A153). If the output count does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 2 output count area (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), step A
If 154 is passed, the process proceeds to step A155. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal 2 output count area. If the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” when “+1” is updated,
It is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 hold (start memory) to be updated corresponding to the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than an upper limit (for example, less than 4) (step A155).
If the number of special figure 2 reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A155; N), the special figure start port 2 switch process is terminated. When the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A155; Y), a special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting the fluctuation information (for example, for distributing the prefetch fluctuation pattern) is set ( In step A156), the special figure 2 suspension number to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A157).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number is calculated (step A158), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the big hit random number storage area of the RWM. (Step A159). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of special figure 2 is extracted, prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A161).

Next, the small hitting design random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hitting design random number storage area of the RWM (step A162), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are stored. The corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area is saved (step A163), and special figure hold information determination processing (step A164) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the monitored special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step A165),
An effect command setting process (step A166) is performed, and the special figure start port 2 switch process is terminated.

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control apparatus 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the start winning opening 92, and becomes a right to execute the special figure variation display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit is stored. Further, the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 2 (start winning opening 92) as a second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A144, step A164) in the special figure start port 1 switch process and the special figure start port 2 switch process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of special figure hold information determination processing according to the first embodiment.

The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (high probability) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that there is a high probability (step A172; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A172 that there is no high probability (step A172; N
) Is determined whether or not a big hit is being made (step A173). If it is determined in step A173 that the game is a big hit (step A173; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A173 that there is no big hit (step A173; N
) Is a big hit determination process (step A174) for determining whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A17).
5). If the determination result is a big hit (step A175; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) is stored. Set (step A176), obtain stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 (step A177), proceed to the processing of step A184, and perform the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), a small hit determination process (step A179) is performed to determine whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. Do it. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A180). If the determination result is not a small hit (step A180)
; N) sets the stop symbol information of discontinuity (step A183), shifts to the processing of step A184, and performs the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set and the small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162 is set. Is set (step A182), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A184, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in any of step A177, step A182, or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and an effect command setting process (step A18
5) Perform. Next, a special figure information setting process (step A186) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. To do.

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern corresponding to the first-half variation number indicating the first-half variation pattern (variation pattern until the start of reach action) and the latter-half variation pattern (variation pattern after the start of reach action) in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. A command is prepared (step A188), an effect command setting process (step A189) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.

The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process (special figure 1 ordinary process or special figure 2 ordinary process described later). It is the same as the processing. That is, when the special figure hold information determination process is executed in step A144, the special figure type is special figure 1, and therefore the processes in steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 1 information setting process and special figure 1 fluctuation described later. When the special figure hold information determination process is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2, and the processes in steps A186 and A187 are special figure 2 information described later. This is the same as the setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

With the above processing, the prefetch stop pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and the prefetch variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the result control (result of prefetching) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is effected before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, in particular the display device 41.
It is possible to notify the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game, for example, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special FIG. 1 game process (step S130a) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special FIG. 1 game process according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game process, monitoring of the input of the special prize opening switch 38a, control of the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 1 (identification information displayed in a variable manner in the special figure 1 variable display game)
Set the display of. In the special figure 1 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit or small hit in special figure 2 (a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game) (step A1). . When not hitting big hit or small hit of Special Figure 2 (Step A1
; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning a prize port switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special prize winning device 38 and the special prize winning switch 38a provided in the special variable prize winning device 95 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit shown in FIG. 2 is being made (step A1; Y) and the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3. If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step A5).
The branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, 1 Special processing for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation 1 Normal processing (step A8)
To do.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1, setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, etc. The process during one change (step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit or the big hit for each big hit Set the fanfare time according to the winning mouth opening pattern,
Special figure 1 display processing (setting of information necessary for processing during the interval)
Step A10) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “3”, setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step A11) to be performed is performed.

If the special figure 1 game processing number is “4” in step A7, an interval command is set if the big win round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the big round is the final round, A large winning opening opening process (step A12) is performed for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing.

If the special figure 1 game processing number is “5” in step A7, if the big hit round is not the final round, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set, while the final round is determined. For example, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and a special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 big hit ending process. Do it.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “7”, the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process are performed. The small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, the setting of information required for performing the small hitting operation transition processing, the command of the small hitting end screen, the small hitting remaining ball processing, etc. A small hitting process (step A16) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", a small hit remaining ball process (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end process is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", special figure 1 small hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 symbol display part 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 1 symbol display part 53 is performed, and a special figure game process Exit. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing To do.

Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (step S130b) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 game process according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game process, monitoring of the input of the special prize opening switch 38a, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game, special figure 2 (identification information displayed in a variable manner in the special figure 2 variable display game)
Set the display of. In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit or small hit in special figure 1 is in effect (a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A31). . When not hitting big hit or small hit of Special Figure 1 (Step A
31; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this special winning a prize port switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special prize winning device 38 and the special prize winning switch 38a provided in the special variable prize winning device 95 is performed.

Next, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit shown in FIG. 1 is being made (step A31; Y)
When the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, step A33 is executed.
If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step A3).
3). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A 34; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is (step A35). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not “0” (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by “−1” (step A36), and the special figure 2 is displayed in the RWM. In the special figure 2 game processing timer area which is an area for storing the game processing timer value, a timer value for long variation (for example, 6
(0000 msec) is saved (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A35;
In Y), a special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (step A38), and the special figure 2 game process number is used by using the table. The branch address of the process corresponding to is acquired (step A39).
. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A4).
7).

If the special figure 2 game process number is “0” in step A47, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 2 special processing for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation, etc.
8) Perform.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2. Processing during fluctuation (step A49) is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of big hit,
Special figure 2 display processing (step A50) is performed for setting fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern for each jackpot and setting information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "3", setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step A51) to be performed is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A52) for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing ball processing, etc. is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “5”, if the big hit round is not the final round, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set while the final round is selected. For example, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, and setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit ending process are performed. Do it.

If the special figure 2 game process number is "6" at step A47, special figure 2 big hit end processing (step A54) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 ordinary processing is performed.

If the special figure 2 game process number is “7” in step A47, the predetermined big winning opening opening time / opening pattern setting, fanfare command setting, and small hitting process are executed when the small hit occurs. Small hitting fanfare in-process (setting information necessary for performing)
Step A55) is performed.

If the special figure 2 game process number is “8” in step A47, the setting of the information required for performing the small hitting operation transition process, the small hit end screen command, the small hit remaining ball process, etc. The small hitting process (step A56) is performed.

If the special figure 2 game process number is “9” in step A47, the small hit remaining ball process (step A57) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "10", special figure 2 small hit end processing (step A58) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 ordinary processing is performed.

Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol variation control process (step A60) according to the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. Exit. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not “0” in step A34 (step A34; N), that is, if the time is not up, or if the processing of step A37 is terminated, the processing of step A59 Shift to processing and perform subsequent processing.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 routine process (step A8) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 ordinary process according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 routine processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to change (that is, whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A251). In this determination, the gaming state is
In the case of the period from the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (big hit or small hit) (start of the processing in the special figure 2 display) to the end of the hit operation (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state), that is, special When FIG. 2 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not the period, the special figure 1 is determined that the fluctuation can be started.

If it is determined that the special figure 1 can start to change (step A251; Y), whether or not the left hand instruction has been notified (that is, the left hand instruction instruction command is transmitted to the effect control device 300,
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a right-handed instruction notification command has not been transmitted (step A2).
52). In step A252, if the left-handed instruction notification flag is set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handed instruction notification flag has not been set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed. It may be configured.

If the left hand instruction notification has not been completed (step A252; N), a left hand instruction notification command is prepared (step A253), an effect command setting process (step A254) is performed, and a left hand instruction notification flag is set (step A253). A255).

When the left hand instruction has been notified (step A252; Y) and when step A255 is completed, the process proceeds to step A256, and whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step A256). If it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (step A256; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure variation display game is prepared (step A257). A setting process (step A258) is performed, and a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed.
A special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of holds is prepared (step A260), a production command setting process (step A261) is performed, and a special figure 1 is displayed in the special figure status area in the RWM.
Information indicating that the game is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) is set (information addition) (step A262), and it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variable display game is high (step A26).
3).

The special figure status area includes information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed) and information indicating that the special figure 2 is being changed (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed). Each of these areas is stored independently, and the state indicated by the information set in this special figure status area is the special figure status. When step A262 is executed, the special figure status is in a state of either “Special Figure 1 Fluctuating” or “Special Figure 1 Fluctuating + Special Figure 2 Fluctuating”.

In the special figure 1 change start process (step A259), the process number "1" related to the special figure 1 changing process is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step A31 described later).
8, A319), processing for saving the changing flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A322 described later), processing for setting the fluctuation time as the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (steps A307, A497 described later) ) Etc. are performed.

If it is not in high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not it is in high probability final variation (step A264). If it is not in high probability final variation (step A264;
In N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step A265). Note that whether or not the high-probability final change is being performed is determined by a high-probability final change flag described later. That is, if the high probability final variation flag is set, it is determined that the high probability final variation is being performed.

And when step A265 is complete | finished, when it determines with it being in high probability (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that it is in high probability final change (step A264;
Y) performs the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step A266) and ends the special figure 1 routine process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start fluctuation (step A251; N), and when the special figure 1 holding number is “0” (step A256; Y) in step A256, the processing number is “0” is set (step A 267), and the processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area which is the area for storing the special figure 1 game processing number in the RWM (step A 268). 1 Regular processing ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the determination result in step A251 is affirmative.
If the special figure 1 holding number is not “0”, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) or the like is executed, and even if the special figure 2 is changing (during the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game). Then, the special figure 1 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the second start memory. Control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 ordinary process (step A48) in the above-described special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 ordinary processing according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 routine processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to change (that is, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A271). In this determination, the gaming state is
In the case of the period from the end of fluctuation (start of processing during display of special figure 1) to the end of the hit operation (big hit game state or small hit game state) in FIG. When FIG. 1 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not the period, the special figure 2 is judged that the fluctuation can be started.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 can start to change (step A271; Y), the special figure 2 is displayed.
It is determined whether or not the number of holds (second start memory number) is “0” (step A272). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” (step A272; N), a change start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state of the special figure change display game is prepared (step A27).
3) The effect command setting process (step A274) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) is performed, and the special figure 2 is changing in the special figure status area in the RWM (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed). Is set (information addition) (step A276),
It is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high (step A277).

Here, the state (that is, the special figure status) indicated by the information set in the special figure status area is “fluctuating special figure 2” and “fluctuating special figure 1 + fluctuating special figure 2” when step A276 is executed. In any of the states.

In the special figure 2 change start process (step A275), a process number "1" related to the special figure 2 changing process is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A34 described later).
8, A349), a process for saving the changing flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352 described later), and a process for setting the fluctuation time as the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (steps A337 and A497 described later). ) Etc. are performed.

In addition, for example, after executing step A275, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared, and then an effect command setting process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step A276 (ie, special figure 2). Also, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a decoration special figure reservation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a normal process.

Then, when the probability is not high (step A277; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is being made (step A278). When the high probability final change is not being made (step A278;
N) sets the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step A279).

Then, when step A279 is completed, when it is determined that a high probability is present (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that a high probability final variation is being performed (step A278;
Y) performs the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step A280) and ends the special figure 2 ordinary process.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A272; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number is “0” (step A281). If it is determined to be “0” (step A281; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A282). And when special figure 1 is not changing (step A282; N), it is judged whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A283),
If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A283; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and an effect command setting process (step A286) is performed. Note that when the production command setting process is performed, the prepared command (
Here, a customer waiting demo command) is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Then, when step A286 is completed, when it is determined that special figure 2 cannot start fluctuation (step A271; N), and when the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (step A281).
N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step A282; Y), and when the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283; Y), “0” is set as the process number ( In step A287), the processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special figure 2 game processing number in the RWM (step A288), and the special figure 2 ordinary processing is terminated.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the determination result of step A271 is affirmative,
If the special figure 2 hold number is not “0”, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) or the like is executed, and even if the special figure 1 is changing (during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game). Then, the special figure 2 variable display game is started. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. Control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) in the special figure 1 ordinary process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation start process of the first embodiment. FIG. 22 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation start process of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, a special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is set (step A301), and the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A302) is performed to set shift information and big hit information for the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the big hit.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
303), the special figure 1 information setting process (step A304) for setting the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 is performed to change the first special figure fluctuation display game. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to pattern settings, is prepared (step A305). Thereafter, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A306) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game, is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step A307) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A308).

If it is not in high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not it is in high probability final variation (step A309). If it is not in high probability final variation (step A309;
N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (step A310). When the special figure 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311). Special figure 2
If the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not “0” (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, “4” or more (step A).
312), if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not, for example, "4" or more (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

Note that the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is as follows in the variation start information setting process of step A337 described later when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a time value (for example, 60000 milliseconds) which is sufficient within the 2-byte range. It is set to “0” (for example, see step A500 described later).

Further, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, step A
In 313, the timer value for long variation saved in step A37 described above (for example, 60000)
The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 can be calculated by adding the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area at that time to the result obtained by multiplying the number of milliseconds) by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer.

When the long variation timer value is 60000 milliseconds (= 60 seconds), for example, the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more. 2 seconds (= 4 × 60 seconds) or more, which is longer than the longest fluctuation time in FIG.
In this case, since it is not necessary to execute Step A315 and Step A316 described later, Step A312 is provided to determine this. Therefore, step A312
The numerical value “4” in FIG. 2 is merely an example of a numerical value for pre-determining whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure 1 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer. Absent.

Next, when step A313 is completed and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A311; Y), the process proceeds to step A314 and the special figure 1 to be started from now on. Fluctuation time (eg, the fluctuation time set in step A306)
Is the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 that is currently changing (the calculation result of step A313 or the special figure 2).
When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is zero, it is determined whether or not the time is shorter than the time shown in FIG.

And when the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 (step A3
14; N) prepares a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is longer (step A315), and performs an effect command setting process (step A316).

Next, when the probability is high (Step A308; Y), when the final probability is high (
Step A309; Y), if special figure 2 is not changing (step A310; N), special figure 2
When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is, for example, “4” or more (step A312;
Y), when the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 (step A314; Y)
) And when step A316 ends, the process proceeds to step A317 (FIG. 22).

When the process proceeds to step A317, the high probability variation frequency update process (step A317) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A318), and the special figure 1 game process number is stored in the RWM. In the game process number area, the process number, that is, “1
"Is saved (step A319), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is the area for setting the customer waiting demo flag in the RWM, is cleared (step A320). After that, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A321), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (
Step A322), the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of the RWM (step A323). The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to the blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during variation in FIG. 1 (step A324), and the special symbol 1 variation start process is terminated. The reason why “0” is saved in the special symbol number changing symbol number area in step A324 is to start the special symbol 1 variable display from the blank symbol.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 ordinary process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment. FIG. 24 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special chart 2 variation start process of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, a special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is set (step A331). A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A332) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
333), a special figure 2 information setting process (step A334) for setting special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of special figure 2 is performed, and the fluctuation of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to pattern settings, is prepared (step A335). Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step A337) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A338).

Then, when the probability is not high (step A338; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is being performed (step A339). When the high probability is not final change (step A339;
N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step A340; Y), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). Note that the remaining fluctuation time in FIG. 1 can be calculated from the value of the special FIG. 1 game processing timer (the value of the special FIG. 1 game processing timer area).

Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 to be started (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) is the current fluctuation of the special figure 1 that is currently changing. It is determined whether or not it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

And when the fluctuation time of special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 (step A3
44; N) prepares a command notifying that the fluctuation time of FIG. 2 is longer (step A345), and performs an effect command setting process (step A346).

Next, when the probability is high (Step A338; Y), when the final probability is high (
Step A339; Y), if special figure 1 is not changing (step A340; N), special figure 2
When the fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time in FIG. 1 (step A344; Y), and
When step A346 is completed, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 24).

When the process proceeds to step A347, the high probability variation number update process (step A347) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 game process number is stored in the RWM. In the game process number area, the process number, that is, “1
”Is saved (step A349), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demo flag in the RWM, is cleared (step A350). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (
Step A352), the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the flashing control timer (the timer of the flashing period of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54) is saved in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area of the RWM (step A353), and the special characteristic of the RWM is saved. The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to the blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during variation in FIG. 2 (step A354), and the special symbol 2 variation start process is terminated. The reason why “0” is saved in the special symbol 2 changing symbol number area in step A354 is to start the special symbol 2 variable display from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps A307 and A337) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 25 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of change start information setting processing according to the first embodiment.
It is. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the change start information setting process according to the first embodiment (
Part 2).

In the change start information setting process, first, the target change pattern random number 1, change pattern random number 2,
And the information of the random number storage area of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step A491). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step A491)
491; Y) clears the information (for the holding ball 1) in the random number storage area (for the holding ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 in FIG. 1 (step A491a). ). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A491; N), the information of the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step S491). A491b).

Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first-half variation time value and the latter-half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is added to the target special game process timer area (that is, the special figure 1 game process timer area, During the setting of the special figure 2 information, it is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A497).

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step A498). If the information of FIG. 1 is not being set (step A498; N), it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation start of FIG. A49
9) If it is not the start of the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step A499; N), the repeat number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (area for storing the repeat number of the special figure 2 game processing timer in the RWM) “0” is saved (step A500).

On the other hand, if it is the start of long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step A499; Y), “9” is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A501). If the information in FIG. 1 is being set (step A498; Y), if the processing of steps A500 and A501 is completed, the process proceeds to step A502.

It should be noted that the special figure game processing timer of 2 bytes causes a fluctuation in time that is not sufficient, so that the special figure 2
The number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set for the long fluctuation. Further, for example, if 60000 ms is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A497 as the addition result of step A496 and “9” is saved as the number of repetitions in step A501, the timer interrupt processing (step A33 described above) is performed. The value of the special figure game process timer is subtracted, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game process timer is decremented by 1 in the step A36, and further in the step A37, 60000 ms is added to the special figure 2 game process timer area. Set. For this reason, in this case, as a result, the total variation time in FIG. 2 is 60000 ms × 10 in this embodiment, resulting in a variation time of 10 minutes. Actually 4
Since the timer interrupt is ms, 2 bytes can be set up to about 262 seconds, but for ease of understanding, a case where it can be expressed by multiplication of 60 seconds is described as an example.

Next, when proceeding to step A502, the data (MODE) of the fluctuation command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is prepared (step A502), and the data (ACTION) of the fluctuation command corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is prepared (step A503). ), Production command setting processing is performed (step A504).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, the prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. Thereby, the effect command consisting of the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. The same applies to the case where the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as “MODE” and “ACTION” like a production command, but it may be configured in a byte configuration beyond that. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a plurality of bytes may be used.

Next, when step A504 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information in FIG. 1 is being set (step A).
505) If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A505; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by "-1" (step A506), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 is set. The random number storage area of the address is set and shifted (step A507), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step A505; N), the special figure 2 holding number is updated by "-1" (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of special figure 2 is set. Then, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information related to the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 by the above-described effect command setting process. The effect control apparatus 300 receives the information related to the start of the special figure change display game, In accordance with the determined variation pattern, detailed effect contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is executed. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variation commands including information on patterns (sometimes referred to as variation pattern commands). For example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of the present embodiment. .

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, the high probability change count update process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (
Details of steps A317 and A347) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 shows the first
It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability variation frequency update process of embodiment.

In the high probability variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A551), and when the special figure high probability is not high (step A551; N)
) Ends the high probability variation number update process.

When one of the types of special figure variable display games in the special figures 1 and 2 is in the big hit game state, the win probability of the other variable display game is controlled to a low probability, but one is small. In the case of a win, the other may be in high probability.

When the probability is high (step A551; Y), the high probability variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state is updated by "-1" (step A552), and the high probability variation is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times is “0” (step A553).

If the high probability variation number is not “0” (step A553; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the high probability variation number is “0” (step A553; Y),
A signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A555).
The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal for turning off the two jackpot signals.

Then, a signal related to the end of high probability & time reduction (high probability & no time reduction or high probability & time reduction) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A556). The signals related to the end of the high probability & short time are the signals that turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signals that turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal. And a signal to
A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. In addition, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the normal figure, so the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always off.

Then, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A557), and the special figure low probability & short time flag is saved in the special game mode flag area (step A559).
), The high probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) to start variation is set (Step A560), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

Note that the high probability final variation flag includes information that can determine the type of special figure variation display game (special diagram 1 or special diagram 2) that is the high probability final variation. In addition, since the internal probability is low at the start of the change in the high-probability final change, the information to show that the change started during the high probability even if the probability is low is now Probability final variation flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high probability final variation, the probability state of the target special figure (the set state in the game control device 100) is returned to the low probability at the start of the variation. Thereby, when the game ball wins the starting opening during the special figure change which is the final round in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent a problem that the hit determination for the starting winning is determined with high probability.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (step A9) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special-figure 1 fluctuation processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special-figure 1 fluctuation processing according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by “+1” (step A5).
71), a command (decorative special figure 1 command including stop symbol information about special figure 1) is loaded from the special special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A572), and effect command setting processing (step A573) is performed. .

Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A574), an effect command setting process (step A575) is performed, and a high probability final change flag is set according to the state of the high probability final variation flag. It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A576). If it is not the high probability final variation (step A576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is set to the current special symbol 1 variation display game. Stop display time (step A577), and in the case of high probability final variation (step A576; Y), the display time at the time of high probability final variation is the
The stop display time of the variable display game is set (step A578), and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579, for example.

As an example of the display time of the special figure 1, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 136 ms is set as the display time.
The display time of the high probability final change is set to 7000 ms.

Next, when proceeding to step A579 (FIG. 29), it is determined whether or not the current (currently executed) special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of the game based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 1 setting process. (Step A579), in the case of deviation (Step A579; Y), Step A
If it moves to 594 and is not off (step A579; N), the special figure 2 is also currently changing (
It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step A580).

Whether or not the special figure 2 is changing is determined based on any one of the special figure 2 game process number area information, the special figure status area information, or the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area information. Can do. In other words, it may be determined that the change is in progress if “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and it is determined that the change is in progress if special figure 2 is changing in the special figure status area. A configuration may be used, or a configuration may be determined in which a changing flag is saved in the special-figure 2 fluctuation control flag area, or a configuration may be determined based on a combination of these conditions.

If special figure 2 is also changing (step A580; Y), it is determined whether special figure 2 display processing is being executed (step A581), and special figure 2 display processing is not being executed. In this case (step A581; N), the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by “+1” (step A
582).

Next, when step A582 is completed and when the special figure 2 display processing is being executed (step A581; Y), the current special figure 1 display time (the time set in step A577 etc.) For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (step A58
3) The display time of the special figure 2 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A5).
84). When the special figure 2 has already started the stop display by the processing of steps A583 and A584, the display time of the special figure 2 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of the special figure 2 is basically extended, but may be shortened in some cases.

After that, a command (decoration special figure 2 command including stop symbol information about special figure 2) is loaded from the special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A585), and an effect command setting process (step A586) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A587), and an effect command setting process (step A)
588), and special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A589) is performed.

It should be noted that according to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, if the current special figure 1 variable display game that stops displaying decorative symbols is a win (big hit or small hit), the special figure that is changing at the same time The change display of 2 is forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A589 is completed and when special figure 2 is not changing (step A5)
80; N) loads a command from the decorative special figure 1 command area, saves it in the winning symbol command area (step A590), and determines whether or not the current special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (step A591). .

And, when it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), in order to control the big hit game after the end of the special figure 1 change, information (see special figure 1) from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area.
Load the special figure 1 round number upper limit information to determine the round number upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit information area (step A592), load information from the special figure 1 big prize opening release information area, and win a big prize Save in the mouth open information area (step A593).

Next, when the current special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of play (step A579; Y), when the current special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit (step A591; Y), step A5
When 93 is completed, the process proceeds to step A594. When moving to step A594,
Load information (stop symbol number) from the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area, save it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (step A594), perform special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step A595), The special-figure 1 changing process is terminated. In the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, the special figure 1
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, when the variation display game based on the first start memory has a special result (winning), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variation display game based on the second start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (step A49) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 30 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special-figure 2 variation processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram (No. 2) illustrating the flowchart of the special-figure 2 changing process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by “+1” (step A6).
01), a command (decoration special figure 2 command including stop symbol information about special figure 2) is loaded from the command special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A602), and an effect command setting process (step A603) is performed. .

Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), an effect command setting process (step A605) is performed, and a high probability final variation flag is set according to the state of the high probability final variation flag. It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A606). If it is not a high probability final variation (step A606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is set to the current special symbol 2 variation display game. Stop display time (step A607), and in the case of high probability final variation (step A606; Y), the display time at the time of high probability final variation is set as the special figure 2 of this time.
The stop display time of the variable display game is set (step A608), and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A607 and A608 is saved, for example, in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A609.

As an example of the display time of Special Figure 2, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, 600 ms is set as the display time, and 600 ms is set as the display time even when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern. The display time of the high probability final change is set to 7000 ms. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the symbol pattern for big hit, the symbol pattern for big hit, and the symbol pattern for small hit. However, different display times may be set.

Next, when proceeding to step A609 (FIG. 31), it is determined whether or not the current (currently executed) special figure 2 variable display game is out of the game based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 2 setting process. (Step A609), in the case of deviation (Step A609; Y), Step A
If the process shifts to 624 and is not out of step (step A609; N), the special figure 1 is also currently changing (
It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step A610).

Whether or not the special figure 1 is changing is determined based on any one of the special figure 1 game process number area information, the special figure status area information, or the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area information. Can do. That is, it may be determined that the change is in progress if “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or it is determined that the change is in progress if special figure 1 is changing in the special figure status area. A configuration may be used, or a configuration may be determined in which a changing flag is saved in the special-figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, or a configuration may be determined based on a combination of these conditions.

If special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is determined whether special figure 1 display processing is being executed (step A611), and special figure 1 display processing is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the symbol determination number output count is updated by “+1” (step A
612).

Next, when step A612 is completed and when the special figure 1 display processing is being executed (step A611; Y), the current special figure 2 display time (the time set in step A607 etc.) For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of FIG. 1 (step A61
3) The display time of the special figure 1 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A6).
14). If the special figure 1 has already started the stop display by the processing of the steps A613 and A614, the display time of the special figure 1 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of FIG. 1 is basically extended, but may be shortened in some cases.

Thereafter, a command (decoration special figure 1 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 1) is loaded from the special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A615), and an effect command setting process (step A616) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A617), and an effect command setting process (step A)
618), and special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step A619) is performed.

In addition, according to the processing of steps A609 to A619 described above, if the current special figure 2 variable display game that stops displaying decorative symbols is a win (big hit or small hit), the special figure that is changing at the same time The change display of 1 is forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A619 is completed and when special figure 1 is not changing (step A6)
10; N) loads a command from the decorative special figure 2 command area, saves it in the winning symbol command area (step A620), and determines whether or not the current special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (step A621). .

And, when it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A621; N), in order to control the big hit game after the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation, information (special figure 2) from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area
Load the special figure 2 round number upper limit information that determines the round number upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit information area (step A622), load information from the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area, and win a big prize Save in the mouth open information area (step A623).

Next, when the current special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of play (step A609; Y), when the current special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (step A621; Y), step A6
When 23 is ended, the process proceeds to step A624. When moving to step A624,
Load information (stop symbol number) from the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area, save it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (step A624), perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A625), The special figure 2 changing process is terminated. In the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, the special figure 2
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, when the variation display game based on the second start memory has a special result (winning), the game control device 100 serves to end the variation display game based on the first start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 1]
Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step A) in the special figure 1 changing process described above.
595) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 mid-display process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, "2", which is a process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as a process number (step A631), and the process is performed in the special figure 1 game process number area. The number, that is, “2” is saved (step A632).

Next, a signal related to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). The signal related to the end of the special symbol 1 variation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 variation signal.

Then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53,
The stop flag relating to the change stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A634), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 1]
Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A) in the special figure 2 changing process described above.
Details of 625) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 display mid-process transition setting process 1 according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, “2”, which is a process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as a process number (step A641), and the process is performed in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, “2” is saved (step A642).

Next, a signal related to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). The signal related to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

Then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54,
The stop flag related to the change stop in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A644), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 2]
Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step A) in the special figure 2 changing process described above.
619) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 display mid-process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment. In this special figure 1 display transition process setting process 2, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has started to change is a win, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that has been changing at the same time is forcibly terminated. It is a process for making it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as a process number (step A651), and the process is performed in the special figure 1 game process number area. The number, that is, “2” is saved (step A652).

Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). The signal related to the end of the special symbol 1 variation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 variation signal.

Then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53,
A stop flag related to the change stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A654), and the stoppage stop pattern pattern is stored in the stop pattern pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM). (Step A655). In this stop symbol pattern area, a special stop symbol pattern (in accordance with the extracted random number extracted, it is usually a stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 1 variation display game already being executed). However, here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly replaced with a stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in the subsequent steps A656 to 661 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset for forced termination at the outset.

Next, the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (area for storing special figure 1 round number upper limit information in the RWM) is cleared (step A656), and the special figure 1 big prize opening release information area (RW)
Clear the special figure 1 big prize opening release information in M) (step A657),
The shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). The shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit or not or whether it is a big hit or not. RWM area that stores such information, and information is normally set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process,
That information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area is cleared (step A660), the shift symbol number is shifted to the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A661), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is ended. .

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A) in the special figure 1 changing process described above.
589) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 according to the first embodiment. In this special figure 2 display transition setting process 2, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that has started to change is a win, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been changing at the same time is forcibly terminated. It is a process for making it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, “2”, which is a process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as a process number (step A671), and the process is performed in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, “2” is saved (step A672).

Next, a signal related to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). The signal related to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

Then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A674), and the stoppage symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM). (Step A675). In this stop symbol pattern area, a special stop symbol pattern (in accordance with the extracted random number extracted, is usually a stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 2 variable display game being executed). However, here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly replaced with a stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in the subsequent steps A676 to 681 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset for forced termination at the outset.

Next, the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (area for storing special figure 2 round number upper limit information in the RWM) is cleared (step A676), and the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area (RW)
Clear the special figure 2 big prize opening release information in M) (step A677),
The shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). The shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or whether it is a big hit or not. RWM area that stores such information, and information is normally set in the big hit flag 2 setting process,
That information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step A680), the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A681), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is ended. .

[Special figure 1 display processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 display process (step A10) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 displaying process of the first embodiment. FIG. 37 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special chart 1 display processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram (No. 3) illustrating the flowchart of the special figure 1 displaying process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and information on the RWM small hit flag 1 area is obtained. Clear (step A702).

Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information in the RWM big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is decided that the big hit is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big win (see Fig. 1) of the first special figure variation display game is determined. A signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step A707), an effect command setting process (step A708) is performed, and the number of rounds An upper limit value table is set (step A709). The signal related to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal for turning on the condition device operating signal, a signal for turning on the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and a signal for turning on the special symbol per signal. Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, “16” or “
4 ”and others (for example,“ 8 ”and“ 2 ”may be present) are acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the RWM hit symbol command area, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A71).
3) Perform. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A).
714), effect command setting processing (step A715) is performed.

Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Note that each on / off is determined by the information about the winning prize opening and the probability state. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on if the big hit other than the 2R sudden hit is on, turned on if the 2R sudden hit big hit with a high probability, and turned off if the 2R hit big hit with a low probability. The big hit 3 signal is turned on if the big hit other than the 2R sudden hit is on, turned off if the 2R sudden hit big hit with a high probability, and turned on if the 2R hit big hit with a low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 m
s, 4700ms, 7700ms, or 300ms) (step A717)
Then, the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A718), and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot to open the top jackpot (special variable winning device 38) (step A719).

If it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step A719; Y), the information on the illegal winning prize number area at the top winning prize area is cleared (step A720), and the fraud monitoring period flag is set in the upper winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A721), and the process proceeds to step A724.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step A719; N), information on the lower prize winning section illegal winning number area is cleared (step A722), and fraud monitoring is performed in the lower big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A723), and the process proceeds to step A724.

When the process proceeds to step A724, 3 is set as the process number (step A724), the process number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step A725), and the process transition setting process for the fanfare / interval (step A725) A726) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A705 (step A705)
N) determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727).
), When it is determined that the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727; Y), it is determined whether or not a high probability final variation is being performed (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the high probability final variation is being performed (step A)
728; Y) prepares a probability information command related to information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game is the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A729) Then, the production command setting process (step A730) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A731), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A731). A732). Note that step A732 assumes a mode in which a right-handed instruction notification is made in a high-probability state, and is configured to clear the right-handed instruction-notification flag because it is determined as a high-probability final change and the high-probability state has ended. Illustrated. However, if this embodiment is a mode in which a right-handed instruction notification is not performed in a high probability state, step A
732 is a deleted configuration (or a left-handed instruction notification in a high probability state, and step A732
Then, there may be a mode in which the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared.

Next, when step A732 is completed and when high probability final fluctuation is not being performed (step A
728; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A).
733), an effect command setting process (step A734) is performed. Subsequently, a small hitting fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and an effect command setting process (step A736). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be left-handed (for example, a state in which the normal power support state, the big hit or the special mode is not in effect) (step A737).

If it is determined in step A737 that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A73)
7; Y), a signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal relating to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the game state display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A742.

On the other hand, if it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A737; N), a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740).
). The signal relating to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to light up the right-handed display LED, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A742.

If it transfers to step A742, it will be determined whether it is the small hit which open | releases the top large prize opening (special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 38) (step A742). If it is a small hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step A742; Y), information on the illegal winning prize number area of the top winning prize opening is cleared (step A743).
Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A7).
44), and proceeds to Step A747.

On the other hand, when it is not the small hit of the upper prize winning opening (step A742; N), the information of the lower prize winning dish illegal winning number area is cleared (step A745), and the lower big winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area is illegal. The flag outside the monitoring period is saved (step A746), and the process proceeds to step A747.

When the process proceeds to step A747, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step A747) is performed, and the special figure 1 display-in process is terminated. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare process transition setting process, a process number "7" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, and a small hit fanfare time (for example, 4) is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area.
m sec) is saved.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not a high-probability final variation is being performed (step A748).
If it is determined in step A748 that a high-probability final change is in progress (step A
748; Y) prepares a probability information command related to information in which the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game is the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A749). Then, effect command setting processing (step A750) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A751), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A751). A752), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is hitting (during big hit or under hit) (step A753). Note that step A752 is merely an example in which a right-handed instruction notification is made in a high-probability state, similar to step A732 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is not being hit (step A753; N)
The signal related to the left-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A754), and the right-handed display LED is turned off. The number in the hit state is saved (step A755). In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is hit (during big hit or small hit), the upper right winning opening (special variable winning device 38) opened at that time is aimed to the right. Since it is in a state to be hit, if the special figure 2 is hit (step A753; Y), steps A754, A
Pass 755 and proceed to step A756. Also, when step A755 ends, the process proceeds to step A756.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A756, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM.
The information indicating that the game is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) is cleared (information subtraction) (step A756), and the process number related to the special figure 1 routine process in the special figure 1 game process number area, that is, “0”.
Is saved (step A757), and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated. Step A75
6 is executed, the special figure status is in a state where only the special figure 2 is changing, or a state where neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 display process (step A50) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a (first) diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 display-in-progress process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a (second) diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 41 is a third diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 displaying process according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A761), and the RWM small hit flag 2 area information is loaded. Clear (step A762).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A763), and the information of the RWM big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step A764). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A765). If the big hit flag 2 is determined to be a big hit (step A765; Y), the big hit (second figure 2) of the second special figure variation display game is determined. A signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A766), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step A767), an effect command setting process (step A768) is performed, and the number of rounds An upper limit value table is set (step A769). The signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is a signal for turning on the condition device operating signal, a signal for turning on the accessory continuous action device operating signal, and a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 hit signal. Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, “16” or “
4 ”and others (for example,“ 8 ”and“ 2 ”may be present) are acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A770). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A771).

Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the RWM hit special figure command area, prepared (step A772), and an effect command setting process (step A77).
3) Perform. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A).
774), production command setting processing (step A775) is performed.

Next, the special winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Note that each on / off is determined by the information about the winning prize opening and the probability state. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on if the big hit other than the 2R sudden hit is on, turned on if the 2R sudden hit big hit with a high probability, and turned off if the 2R hit big hit with a low probability. The big hit 3 signal is turned on if the big hit other than the 2R sudden hit is on, turned off if the 2R sudden hit big hit with a high probability, and turned on if the 2R hit big hit with a low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 m
s, 4700ms, 7700ms, or 300ms) (step A777)
Then, the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A778), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (special variable winning device 38) (step A779).

If it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step A779; Y), information on the illegal winning prize number area at the top winning prize area is cleared (step A780), and the fraud monitoring period flag is set in the upper winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A781), and the process proceeds to step A784.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit for the upper prize winning opening (step A779; N), the information on the lower prize winning dish illegal winning number area is cleared (step A782), and illegal monitoring is performed in the lower big winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A783), and the process proceeds to step A784.

When the process proceeds to step A784, 3 is set as the process number (step A784), the process number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A785), and the process transition setting process for the fanfare / interval (step A785) A786) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit in step A765 (step A765)
N) determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787).
), When it is determined that the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787; Y), it is determined whether or not a high probability final variation is being performed (step A788).

If it is determined in step A788 that a high-probability final change is in progress (step A
788; Y) prepares a probability information command related to information in which the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game is the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A789). Then, the production command setting process (step A790) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A791), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A791). A792). Step A792 assumes a mode in which a right-handed instruction notification is made in a high-probability state, and is configured to clear the right-handed instruction-notification flag because it is determined as a high-probability final change and the high-probability state has ended. Illustrated. However, if this embodiment is a mode in which a right-handed instruction notification is not performed in a high probability state, step A
792 is a deleted configuration (or a left-handed instruction is notified in a high probability state, and step A792 is performed.
Then, there may be a mode in which the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared.

Next, when step A792 is completed and when high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A
788; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A).
793), an effect command setting process (step A794) is performed. Subsequently, a small hitting fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and an effect command setting process (step A796). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be left-handed (for example, a state in which the power transmission support state is not in a big hit or special mode) (step A797).

If it is determined in step A797 that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A79)
7; Y), a signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). The signal relating to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the game state display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A802.

On the other hand, if it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A797; N), a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A800).
). The signal relating to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to light up the right-handed display LED, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A801), and the process proceeds to step A802.

If it transfers to step A802, it will be determined whether it is the small hit which open | releases the top large prize opening (special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 38) (step A802). If it is a small hit for opening the top university winning opening (step A802; Y), the information of the upper winning section illegal winning number area is cleared (step A803).
Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A8).
04), the process proceeds to Step A807.

On the other hand, if it is not a small hit for the upper prize winning opening (step A802; N), the information on the lower prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step A805), and the lower big winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area is illegal. The flag outside the monitoring period is saved (step A806), and the process proceeds to step A807.

When the process proceeds to step A807, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step A807) is performed, and the special figure 2 display-in-process is terminated. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process, the special figure 2 game process number area saves "7" as the process number, and the special figure 2 game process timer area has a small hit fanfare time (for example, 4).
m sec) is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not a high probability final change is being performed (step A808).
If it is determined in step A808 that a high probability final variation is being performed (step A
808; Y) prepares a probability information command related to information in which the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game is the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A809). Then, an effect command setting process (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A811), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A811). A812), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (
Step A813). Note that step A812 is merely an example in which a right-handed instruction notification is made in a high-probability state, similar to step A792 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (step A813; N
), The signal related to the left-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A814), and the right-handed display LED is turned off. The number in the left-handed state is saved (step A815). In the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is in a big hit, it is in a state where it should be right-handed aiming at the upper prize winning opening (special variable winning device 38) that is opened at that time. If Special Figure 1 is a big hit (Step A813; Y), Steps A814 and A815 are passed and the process proceeds to Step A816. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is in a small hit, the player should be left-handed aiming at the lower large winning opening (special variable winning device 95) that is opened at that time. If special figure 1 is not a big hit (step A813; N) (including the case where special figure 1 is a small hit), step A814 and step A815 are executed after step A81.
Move to 6. However, the processing content related to such right-handed left-handed and left-handed changes depending on the board configuration and game characteristics of the gaming machine, and is merely an example. Also here, step A815.
When the process ends, the process proceeds to step A816.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A816, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM.
Clears (information subtraction) information indicating that the game is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (step A816), and the process number related to the special figure 2 routine process in the special figure 2 game process number area, that is, “0”.
Is saved (step A817), and the special figure 2 display processing is terminated. Step A81
6 is executed, the special figure status is in a state where only the special figure 1 is changing, or a state where neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a first diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a second diagram illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) are displayed. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

In the external information editing process, first, a process for setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error state and the security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The ON signal of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, if neither the glass frame opening error nor the body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S71). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is “0”.
If not, "-1" is updated (step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. And the value of the security signal control timer is “0”
Is determined (step C78).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step C78; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, the value of the security signal control timer is “0”.
(Step C78; Y), that is, if the time is up, step C79.
Is passed. That is, from the time when the initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the security signal control timer after the data stored in the RAM is initialized in the main processing described above, until the security signal control timer expires, On-data of the security signal is output as external information.

Next, a magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), a panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step C81;
Y), fraud of the frame radio wave is occurring (step C82; Y), and the prize winning fraud is occurring (step C83).
Y), or when special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step C84; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is stored. Save in the test signal output data area (step C86). In the case of the occurrence of unauthorized power transmission, the security signal ON data is similarly saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) A configuration may be adopted.

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, general electric power fraud, special prize opening fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), switch abnormality 1 or It is determined whether or not a switch abnormality 2 is occurring (step C87).
If no switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C88).

If any switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C8).
6). Here, the special figure 2 abnormal variation, switch abnormality, and the like are abnormalities monitored in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process in the timer interruption process.

Next, after finishing Step C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the start port 1 (
The start opening 1 signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal (start opening 1 signal) of the starting winning opening 36, which is the start winning opening 36 of FIG. A start port 2 signal editing process (step C90) for editing a winning signal (start port 2 signal) of the start winning port 92) which is the start winning port of FIG. Subsequently, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C91) for editing a main prize ball signal relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol decision number signal is output based on the number of symbol decision times output (number of times of symbol decision number signal output). The symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step C92) for editing is performed, and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main processing]
Next, main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits interruption.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial setting of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs initial setting of the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits an interrupt.

[Step D15] The control unit permits generation of display data. That is, the control unit
A display circuit (not shown) in the DP 312 accesses a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 to permit generation of display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a generation sequence of pseudo-random numbers using, for example, a strand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the strand function, or use a value created based on an ID value of the CPU or the like so as to differ for each gaming machine. May be.

[Step D17] The control unit performs RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300.
The initial value when the power is turned on is saved in an area to be initialized (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control apparatus 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes an effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process of performing editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) are operated when they are valid. Since the effect button does not turn on / off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of sensing the input of the effect button within the effect button input process or within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes hall / player setting mode processing. Hall / player setting mode processing includes setting of changeable ranges such as brightness and volume of LEDs and display device 41,
This is a process of accepting an operation such as a change in brightness or volume of the LED or the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit performs a random number update process. The random number update process is, for example, r
This is a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using the and function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence every time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the rand function. A counter that increments by “1” like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is V
This is a process for setting various commands and parameters for instructing the DP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table form in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing. If the frame switching timing, the control unit proceeds to Step D26, and if not the frame switching timing, waits for the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is V blank interrupt (
This timing comes at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of V sync interrupt. Note that the V blank interrupt occurs every time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation period of the V blank interrupt is 1/60 seconds, for example, as described above. In the case of the present embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt is generated twice, the frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a period of 1/30 seconds or more, or less than 1/30 seconds. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

Subsequent processing (step D26 to step D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed for each processing cycle at this frame switching timing by the frame switching timing determination processing. Note that time management that needs to be synchronized with the contents of the effects is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of the processing cycles). When the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames is 100 ms. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

[Step D26] The control unit performs VDP3 according to the command set in Step D23.
12 is instructed to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of sound from speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes a decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, the board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

[Step D30] The control unit executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch state flag, and produces an effect corresponding to the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount (that is, a predetermined number of rental balls)) This is a process for correcting the mode.

The control unit returns to Step D18 after executing Step D30, and thereafter performs Step D1.
Steps 8 to D30 are repeatedly executed. That is, Step D18 to Step D
30 is a loop process (repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after the production control device 300 is activated).
In some cases, this is called main loop processing).

Note that the control unit executes the processing from step D27 to step D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the presentation of the screen, but the signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processing. The process of actually outputting a drive control signal or the like to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, in the case where an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Received command check processing]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a view illustrating a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The received command (production command) is MODE data (1 byte) and ACTIO.
N commands (1 byte) are included, and the effect commands are sequentially transmitted from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

The command reception process from the main board is the “command reception interrupt process” (not shown).
Is done by. In other words, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when reception of the command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. It is only necessary to take out from the buffer, but in the above “command reception interrupt processing”, every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer and the loaded command data is checked for any abnormalities. Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply “storing” means storing in a predetermined storage area so that it can be read out for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is constituted by a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311, for example. The capacity of the command buffer only needs to be equal to or greater than the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-described processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the command reception number. The command reception counter is RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a).
Set to Since the command reception counter is cleared to “0” in principle in step D43, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time corresponding to one cycle of the above-described processing cycle).

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether the command reception number is not “0 (zero)”. If the command reception number is not “0”, the process proceeds to step D43, and if the command reception number is “0”. If so, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, as in the above step D41, “loading” data in the control process means that the RAM (the effect control device 300 in this example) is used.
This means that data is taken out from the RAM 322 or RAM 311a).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of received commands, step D41.
Immediately after execution of “A = B”. Immediately after execution of step D43, “A = A−B =
“0” is a normal movement, but in the aspect of this example, the production control device 300 is a game control device (
Since the command reception interrupt from the main board 100 is given the highest priority without prohibiting the interrupt, the value of A may increase between the process of step D41 and the process of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count shifts.
Then, the subtraction process “A−B” is performed. However, when serial communication is used for transmission / reception of commands from the main board as in this embodiment, the interrupt is disabled so that the value of A does not increase during the processing from step D41 to step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be “A ← 0”.

[Step D44] The control unit stores the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, which may be simply referred to as a command buffer hereinafter) (that is, command data stored at an address corresponding to a read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is the command buffer read pointer, by, for example, “1” in the range of “0” to “31”. Do it. “0” to “31” here
This range corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (
That is, it is determined whether step D44 and step D45 have been repeatedly executed by the number of received commands. The control unit proceeds to step D47 when copying of commands for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when copying is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data that has not yet been read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). To do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes a received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not the steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the command for the number of received commands has not been analyzed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit sets the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process to MODE and the lower byte to ACT.
And store them separately. In the case of a fluctuation-type command that commands a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first-half fluctuation pattern, and AC
The lower byte data stored as T is for instructing the latter half fluctuation pattern.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE value separated in Step D51 is within a normal range. When the value of MODE is within the normal range, the control unit performs step D53.
If the MODE value is not within the normal range, the received command analysis process is terminated. In addition,
Some MODE values are not defined and are not used. When these values are not used, it is determined in step D52 that they are not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in Step D51 is within a normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined as follows, for example, whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper limit to lower limit of the effective value of this ACT is a predetermined ACTION check table (
In step D53, it is checked whether the value of the ACT separated within the upper limit to the lower limit is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined as the normal range (at this time, a tooth described later) Missing check is not done).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value with respect to the separated MODE value is a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT value is the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined using, for example, a match check table. The coincidence check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) that are valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the top address, and is provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT value is a correct combination is performed including a missing tooth check that determines whether or not the ACT value is a normal ACT combination. There are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, but these values are not always continuous (ie, there are values that do not exist discontinuously, values that are missing). It is confirmed whether or not is a valid value. Since only valid values are defined in the coincidence check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if it matches any of them.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes the variable command process (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. .

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). A fluctuation command (sometimes referred to as a fluctuation command or a fluctuation pattern command) is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of the fluctuation command can take is a fluctuation command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. . The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the jackpot effect, and the range that the data of the jackpot command can take is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol command range. . A symbol-related command (sometimes referred to as a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for instructing information related to a special symbol symbol (for example, what is to be a special symbol stop symbol). The range that the data can take is the symbol-type command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. . Unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. The range that the single command data can take is the single command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-read symbol command range. The control unit executes pre-read symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the pre-read symbol system command range (step D64), and if the MODE data is not within the pre-read symbol system command range, step Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch fluctuation command range. The control unit executes prefetch fluctuation command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the prefetch fluctuation command range (step D66), and is received when the MODE data is not within the prefetch fluctuation command range. The command analysis process ends.

Note that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command are commands for prefetch effects. When any of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 is completed, the received command analysis process is terminated.

Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as a pre-reading notice or a pre-reading notice effect) is a start prize memory in which the special display variable display game is not executed (the start prize memory is held or simply held)
In order to notify the player in advance with a certain degree of reliability whether or not the variation display game corresponding to (2) will be a big hit (or what variation pattern will result) It is an effect such as performing in a mode different from normal. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing the change pattern corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory to be prefetched and the stop symbol in advance. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the orientations of components mounted on the board are aligned in a specific direction. First, the board arrangement environment in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 47 shows a state in which the gaming machine 10 opens the front frame 12 with respect to the outer frame (main body frame) 11. The gaming machine 10 is configured to perform maintenance work by a staff member by fixing the outer frame 11 to a game hall facility generally called an island and opening the front frame 12. for that reason,
The gaming machine 10 is superior in maintenance workability in the installation environment on the open side rather than the shaft support side that pivotally supports the front frame 12 on the outer frame 11. In particular, in recent gaming machines, the front frame 12 has a large amount of protrusion of the front side structural members (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper plate 21). Or the card unit or the like), the opening amount of the front frame 12 may be limited. The outer frame 11 is capable of opening and closing the front frame 12 with the left side as a rotation axis, but may be capable of opening and closing the front frame 12 with the right side as a rotation axis.

The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300 on the back side of the game board 30. The game control device 100 includes a game control board 510 accommodated in the board box with the connector connection portion facing. The effect control device 300 includes an effect control board 511 accommodated in the board box with the connector connecting portion facing. Further, the front frame 12 includes various substrates 512, 513, 514 that face the back side from the front frame 12. Various substrates 512, 513, 514
Control boards (for example, payout control boards), relay boards (for example, relay boards 70), other boards (for example, LED boards and sensor boards), and the like. Further, the front frame 12 makes the component mounting surface visible when the front frame 12 is opened, so that the game control board 510 and the effect control board 511 are displayed.
The various substrates 512, 513 and 514 are supported.

The gaming machine 10 includes a game control board 510, an effect control board 511, and various boards 512, 5
13 and 514 are electrically connected by a harness. At this time, the harness functions as a signal line for transmitting and receiving signals between the substrates or a power line for transmitting power between the substrates.

The front frame 12 includes various substrates and a harness that is not shown but is connected to the substrate so as to face the back surface. In addition, the front frame 12 may have a board | substrate and a harness face the back side through the protective cover which is not shown in figure.

Next, the game control device 100 supported by the front frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of the game control device of the second embodiment and an attachment base that supports the game control device with a front frame. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of an AA cross section of the game control device of the second embodiment.

The front frame 12 includes a mounting base 521 through which the game control device 10 is connected.
0 is supported. The game control device 100 houses the game control board 510 in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and includes an engaging portion 522 on the upper long side and a locking portion 523 on the opposite side on the lower side. The mounting base 521 has a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly larger than the board box 520, and includes engaged portions 522 a and 522 b corresponding to the engaging portions 522, and locked portions 523 a corresponding to the locking portions 523. Is provided.

The board box 520 first engages the engaging portion 522 and the engaged portions 522a and 522b, and places the engaging portion 522 on the mounting base 521 with the engaging portion 522 as a rotation shaft, and then the locking portion 523. By being locked to the locked portion 523a, the mounting base 521 is fixed. The substrate box 520
Is removed from the mounting base 521, the board box 520 requires an operation of releasing the locking state between the locking portion 523 and the locked portion 523a. Therefore, the locking portion 523 is connected to the gaming machine 10
For a worker who performs the maintenance work, a side surface as an operation unit for releasing the locked state of the board box 520 is provided.

The board box 520 includes an upper member 5201 and a lower member 5202 as main structures, and the game control board 510 is sandwiched and accommodated between the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202. The upper member 5201 supports the game control board 510 with a board support portion 5203 (for example, a boss), and fixes the game control board 510 with screws 5204. The lower member 5202 supports the game control board 510 by a board support portion 5205 (for example, a rib). Thereby, the game control board 510 is supported with a predetermined gap from the outer surfaces of both the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202.

The upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 are caulked by a caulking portion 524 (for example, a screw). The caulking unit 524 enables switching between the caulking state and the caulking cancellation state for a predetermined number of times, leaving a trace. For example, the caulking portion 524 has a required number of screws before caulking, and caulking one of them to make a caulking state, and destroying a portion prepared in advance of the substrate box 520 (for example, The crimped state can be solved while holding a resin cut mark or the like. In addition, the substrate box 520 includes a sealing portion 525, and a sealing seal 525a is affixed thereto so that the presence / absence of opening of the substrate box 520 can be detected by the state of the sealing seal 525a. For example, the sealing seal 525a may include a substrate box 520.
It is broken by opening, and the fact that the substrate box 520 has been opened is shown by the broken state. Note that the sealing seal 525a may include an RF (Radio Frequency) tag or the like, and whether or not the substrate box 520 is opened by short-range wireless communication (for example, by detecting the destruction of the antenna due to communication failure). It may be one that can be detected.

The game control board 510 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 510 is a two-layer board having a front surface as a component mounting surface and a back surface as a solder surface. The game control board 510 includes a required number of connectors 530 and components 540 on a component mounting surface. Part 540
Are not exposed to the outside in the board box 520 so that they cannot be replaced with unauthorized parts. On the other hand, the connector 530 faces the outside of the board box 520 through a window portion 5209 serving as an opening provided in the board box 520 (upper member 5201), and can be connected to a predetermined harness. Note that the game control board 510 suppresses the harness from obstructing the observation of the component mounting surface by disposing many of the connectors 530 on the upper side. Further, the game control board 510 has a connector disposed on the lower side, but such a connector is limited to a connector (for example, a connector for inspection) that does not connect a harness in an operating environment. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 achieves both efficiency of component placement and suppression of obstacles in observing the component mounting surface.

Next, the mounting of resistors (resistors) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of the game control board according to the second embodiment and the direction of resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 50 (1) includes the required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and includes the required number of resistors 541 and 542 on the component mounting surface as the components 540 in the required orientation. The resistor 541 is a resistor disposed in a direction along the left-right direction of the front frame 12. The resistor 542 is a resistor disposed in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction of the front frame 12, that is, a direction along the vertical direction of the front frame 12.

The resistors 541 and 542 are passive elements that display a rating by a color code, and have a required number of color bands. For example, the resistors 541 and 542 have four color bands, and the first color band 54
3, the second number indicated by the second color band 544, the multiplier indicated by the third color band 545,
The nominal resistance value tolerance indicated by the fourth color band 546 is displayed. Therefore, resistors 541 and 542
Makes it easy to confirm the first color band 543, thereby improving the ease of confirmation as the resistors 541 and 542. The resistors 541 and 542 are connected to the first color band 54 on the side where the color band interval is narrow.
3 is displayed, and a fourth color band 546 is displayed on the side where the color band interval is wide.

As shown in FIG. 50 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 toward the left side of the front frame 12. The front frame 12 has a left side with respect to the main body frame 11 as an open side (open end side) and a right side as a shaft support side (rotation shaft side). Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12. In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 facing the shaft support side of the front frame 12.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the resistance 541 of the worker who opens the front frame 12 and performs the maintenance inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the lower side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 replaces the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 with the front frame 1.
2, the resistor 542 is mounted toward the lower side. In other words, the game control board 510 has a resistance 5
The resistor 542 is mounted with the fourth color band 546 of 42 facing the upper side of the front frame 12.

Further, the game control board 510 includes a connector 530a used for game control and a connector 530b (test connector) used for predetermined inspection and not used for game control. The connector 530a has a harness connected to the game control board 510 for connecting a predetermined connector to the harness.
If it is applied to the component mounting surface, the visibility of the mounted component may be hindered. That is, the game control board 510 has a better visibility of the first color band 543 than the fourth color band 546, even if the harness may be on the component mounting surface of the game control board 510. Improve ease of confirmation. Note that the connector 530b does not become an obstacle to the observation of the component mounting surface because the connector is not connected when the gaming machine 10 is operating in the game hall.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the resistance 542 of the worker (easiness of inspection work). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

Next, the mounting of resistors (resistors) on the game control board 510 is shown in FIG.
Will be described. FIG. 51 is a second diagram illustrating an example of the game control board according to the second embodiment and the direction of resistance mounted on the game control board.

A game control board 510 shown in FIG. 51 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on a component mounting surface, and a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as components 540 in a required orientation on the component mounting surface. The game control board 510 is accommodated in the board box 520 and supported by the front frame 12 with the engaging part 522 of the board box 520 facing upward and the locking part 523 facing downward.

As shown in FIG. 51 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 toward the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the resistance 541 of the worker who opens the front frame 12 and performs the maintenance inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (3), the resistor 542 has a first color band 543 connected to the substrate box 52.
The fourth color band 546 is directed toward the engaging portion 522 side of the substrate box 520 toward the 0 locking portion 523 side.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 opens the front frame 12 and performs maintenance and inspection work on the basis of the locking portion 523 serving as an operation portion when removing the board box 520 from the front frame 12,
The operator can confirm the resistance 542. That is, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 52 from another viewpoint. FIG. 52 is a third diagram illustrating an example of the game control board according to the second embodiment and the direction of resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 52 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and one connector 530b on the component mounting surface. The connector 530a is a connector used for game control, and the connector 530b is, for example, a test connector, which is used for a predetermined test and is not used for game control. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 is normally connected to the connector 530a with a required harness but is not connected to the connector 530b when the game machine 10 is in business operation. Further, the connector 530b can be easily distinguished from the connector 530a from the viewpoint of whether or not the harness is connected to the connector. In addition to the presence or absence of the harness connection, the connector 530b may be distinguished by being given a different color from the connector 530a so that the connector 530b is red and the connector 530a is non-red. Further, in addition to the presence or absence of harness connection, the connector 530b may be distinguished by a shape different from the connector 530a so that the connector 530b is a modular type and the connector 530a is a non-modular type.

In addition, the game control board 510 includes a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as components 540 on the component mounting surface in a required direction, and a processor 532 on the component mounting surface. For example, the processor 532 is the gaming microcomputer 111. The processor 532 can be distinguished from other integrated circuits (for example, driver ICs) by attaching a sticker or the like that displays the model name. The processor 532 can also be distinguished by the maximum number of pins among the components mounted on the game control board 510. Further, the processor 532 may be distinguished by being given a predetermined color so that the processor 532 is blue and other integrated circuits are non-blue (eg, black).

Thereby, the game control board 510 is a connector 530b as a specific connector to be mounted.
The processor 532 can be specified as a specific integrated circuit to be mounted.

The game control board 510 arranges the connector 530b and the processor 532 with an offset d1 in the left-right direction and an offset d2 in the up-down direction. With respect to the offset d1, the direction in which the connector 530b is located with respect to the processor 532 is a positive direction, and the direction in which the connector 530b is not located is a negative direction. In addition, the offset d2 is a direction in which the connector 530b is positioned with respect to the processor 532 as a positive direction, and the connector 5
The direction in which 30b is not located is the negative direction.

As shown in FIG. 52 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 toward the positive direction side of the offset d1, and directs the fourth color band 546 toward the negative direction side of the offset d1.
Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clarifies the reference direction of the resistor 541 and improves the ease of confirming the resistor 541 for the operator who opens the front frame 12 and performs the maintenance inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

As shown in FIG. 52 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 toward the positive direction side of the offset d2, and directs the fourth color band 546 toward the negative direction side of the offset d2.
Thereby, the gaming machine 10 clarifies the reference direction of the resistor 542, and improves the ease of confirming the resistor 542 for an operator who opens the front frame 12 and performs maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

The positive direction of the offset d1 is the same as the front frame opening side, and the negative direction of the offset d1 is the same as the front frame pivot side. The positive direction of the offset d2 is the same as the lower side of the front frame, and the negative direction of the offset d1 is the same as the upper side of the front frame. Similarly, offset d2
Is the same as the board box engaging part side, and the negative direction of the offset d2 is the same as the board box engaging part side.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has a resistance 5 while clarifying the reference direction of the resistances 541 and 542.
41 and the resistance of the resistor 542 can be improved.
Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 53 from another viewpoint. FIG. 53 is a diagram (No. 4) illustrating an example of the game control board of the second embodiment and the direction of resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 53 (1) includes the required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface, and includes the required number of resistors 541 and 542 on the component mounting surface as components 540 in the required orientation. The game control board 510 is accommodated in the board box 520 and sealed by the sealing seal 5251 at the sealing portion 525.

The sealing seal 5251 displays a required character or design. For example, sealing seal 5251
Displays the character “unopened”. The sealing seal 5251 may display management information by displaying images such as alphanumeric characters, symbols, and two-dimensional codes. Further, the sealing seal 5251 may clarify the origin or display a design for preventing forgery. The sealing seal 5251 is a seal seal 525 depending on a required character or design.
Specify the positive position of 1. For example, in the sealing seal 5251, the direction in which the right side in the figure is viewed downward is the normal position (sealing portion reference).

As shown in FIG. 53 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 toward the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the resistance 541 of the worker who opens the front frame 12 and performs the maintenance inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (3), the resistor 542 has the first color band 543 on the sealing portion reference left side (
The fourth color band 546 is directed to the sealing portion reference right side (upper side in the drawing) toward the lower side in the drawing.
Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can cause the operator to check the resistance 542 with the sealing portion 525 as a reference when performing the maintenance and inspection work with the front frame 12 opened. That is, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510. Note that since the confirmation of the soundness of the sealing seal 525 and the confirmation of the game control board 510 are closely related, it is easy for the operator to use the sealing portion 525 as a reference.

Next, the mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 from still another viewpoint. FIG. 54 is a diagram (No. 5) illustrating an example of the game control board according to the second embodiment and the direction of resistance mounted on the game control board.

A game control board 510 shown in FIG. 54 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on a component mounting surface, and a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as components 540 on a component mounting surface in a required orientation. The game control board 510 is accommodated in the board box 520 and sealed by the sealing seal 5251 at the sealing portion 525. The board box 520 has a management number seal 5206 attached to the surface thereof. The management number seal 5206 displays necessary information while making it easy to confirm the component mounting surface using a transparent base. For example, the management number seal 5206 displays a main board management number as required information. For example, the management number seal 5206 displays necessary information in black or white with a solid background of characters as required. The management number sticker 5206 clearly indicates the correct position of the management number sticker 5206 by displaying necessary information. For example, in the management number seal 5206, the direction in which the lower side in the figure is viewed downward is the normal position (management number seal reference).

The sealing seal 5251 displays a required character or design. For example, sealing seal 5251
Displays the character “unopened”. The seal seal 5251 clearly indicates the normal position of the seal seal 5251 with a required character or design. For example, the seal seal 5251 has a normal position (sealing seal reference) as viewed from the right side in the drawing.

The direction of the management number seal reference and the direction of the sealing seal reference are orthogonal. The direction of the management number seal reference indicates the direction in which the resistor 541 is disposed, and the direction of the seal seal reference indicates the direction in which the resistor 542 is disposed.

As shown in FIG. 54 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the management number seal reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the left side of the management number seal reference.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the operator confirm the management number seal 5206 so that the position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 can be grasped, and the ease of confirmation of the resistor 541 is improved. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

As shown in FIG. 54 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the sealing seal reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing the left side of the sealing seal reference.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 causes the operator to confirm the sealing seal 5251 so that the resistance 54
The position of the second first color band 543 can be grasped, and the ease of confirmation of the resistor 542 is improved. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

Note that the management number seal 5206 and the sealing seal 5251 are closely related to the identification of the game control device type by the management number seal 5206, the soundness confirmation of the sealing seal 5251, and the confirmation of the game control board 510. Setting the standard is easy for the operator to understand.

Next, the display of the part number on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of display of resistors and corresponding part numbers mounted on the game control board of the second embodiment.

The part number 547 shown in FIG. 55A is displayed in the same direction as the resistor 541 in the vicinity of the resistor 541. The part number 547 displays, for example, the character “R15”. At this time, the first character “R” of the part number 547 is on the first color band 543 side of the resistor 541, and the last character “5” of the part number 547 is on the fourth color band 546 side of the resistor 541.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to find the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 by using the first character of the part number 547 as a clue. In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes the first color band 543 of the resistor 541.
This makes it easy to find the first character of the part number 547.

The part number 548 shown in FIG. 55 (2) is displayed in the same direction as the resistor 542 in the vicinity of the resistor 542. The part number 548 displays, for example, the character “R16”. At this time, the first character “R” of the part number 548 is on the first color band 543 side of the resistor 542, and the last character “6” of the part number 548 is on the fourth color band 546 side of the resistor 542.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to find the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 by using the first character of the part number 548 as a clue. In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes the first color band 543 of the resistor 542.
This makes it easy to find the first character of the part number 548.

Up to this point, the components 540 included in the game control board 510 have been described using the resistors 541 and 542, but the components provided on the component mounting surface in a required direction are not limited thereto. Components provided on the component mounting surface in a required direction will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating an example of components provided on the component mounting surface according to the second embodiment.

For example, the game control board 510 may include a chip (surface mount) type resistor 549 as shown in FIG. 56 (1). The resistor 549 is a passive element that displays a rating by a character string, and has a required number of characters. The resistor 549 has three characters and displays the first number, the second number, and the multiplier in order from the left. For example, resistor 549 has three letters “1”.
, “0”, “2” indicate 1 kΩ. Therefore, the resistance 549 can improve the ease of confirmation of the resistor 549 by facilitating confirmation of the first character.

The part number 550 is displayed in the same direction as the character string displayed by the resistor 549 near the resistor 549. The part number 550 displays, for example, the character “R16”. At this time, part number 5
The first character “R” of 50 is on the “1” side indicating the first number of the resistor 549, and the last character “6” of the part number 550 is on the “2” side indicating the multiplier of the resistor 549.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to find the first number of the resistor 549 by using the first character of the part number 550 as a clue. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to find the first character of the part number 550 by using the first number of the resistor 549 as a clue.

The game control board 510 may include a capacitor 551 as shown in FIG. 56 (2). The capacitor 551 is a passive element that displays a rating by a color code, and has a required number of color bands. The capacitor 551 has three color bands, and displays a first number indicated by the first color band 552, a second number indicated by the second color band 553, and a multiplier indicated by the third color band 554. Therefore, the capacitor 551 can improve the ease of confirmation of the capacitor 551 by facilitating confirmation of the first color band 552. The capacitor 551 displays the first color band 552 on the side where the color band interval is narrow, and displays the third color band 554 on the side where the color band interval is wide.

The part number 555 indicates that the color band group displayed by the capacitor 551 is aligned and the capacitor 551 is aligned.
Is displayed in the vicinity of. The part number 555 displays, for example, the character “C10”. At this time, the first character “C” of the part number 555 is on the first color band 552 side of the capacitor 551, and the last character “0” of the part number 555 is on the third color band 554 side of the capacitor 551.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the first character of the part number 555 as a clue, and the capacitor 5
Facilitates discovery of the first number of 51. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to find the first character of the part number 555 by using the first number of the capacitor 551 as a clue.

Further, the game control board 510 may include a capacitor 556 as shown in FIG. The capacitor 556 is a passive element that displays a rating by a character string, and has a required number of characters. Capacitor 556 has three characters and is first in order from the left.
Number, second number, and multiplier are displayed. For example, capacitor 556 has three letters “1”,
“0” and “3” indicate 10,000 pF. Therefore, the capacitor 556 can improve the ease of confirmation of the capacitor 556 by facilitating confirmation of the first character.

The part number 557 indicates the direction in which the character strings displayed by the capacitor 556 are arranged.
Is displayed in the vicinity of. The part number 557 displays, for example, the character “C11”. At this time, the first character “C” of the part number 557 is on the “1” side indicating the first number of the capacitor 556, and the last character “1” of the part number 557 is on the “3” side indicating the multiplier of the capacitor 556. .

As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the first character of the part number 557 as a clue, and the capacitor 5
Facilitates discovery of the first number of 56. Also, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to find the first character of the part number 557 by using the first number of the capacitor 556 as a clue.

[Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the second embodiment, the orientations of the components mounted on the board are aligned in a specific direction related to the two-dimensional code provided in each of the management number seal and the sealing seal. The mounting of resistors (resistors) on the game control board 510 according to the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of the game control board of Modification 1 of the second embodiment and the direction of resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 510 shown in FIG. 55 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface and a required number of resistors 541 and 542 as components 540 on the component mounting surface in a required orientation. The game control board 510 is accommodated in the board box 520 and sealed by the sealing seal 5252 at the sealing portion 525. The board box 520 has a management number seal 5207 attached to the surface thereof. The management number seal 5207 displays necessary information while making it easy to confirm the component mounting surface using a transparent base. For example, the management number seal 5207 displays a management code 5208 as required information. For example, the management code 5208 displays a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)). The management code 5208 clearly indicates the normal position of the management code 5208 by a display mode in which an alignment pattern appearing in the pattern is displayed on the lower right side. For example, in the management code 5208, the direction in which the lower side in the figure is viewed downward is the normal position (management code reference).

The sealing seal 5252 displays a sealing code 5253 as necessary information. For example,
The sealing code 5253 displays a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)). The sealing code 5253 clearly indicates the normal position of the sealing code 5253 by a display mode in which an alignment pattern appearing in the pattern is displayed on the lower right side. For example, the sealing cord 52
53, the direction in which the right side of the figure is viewed downward is the normal position (sealing code reference).

The direction of the management code reference and the direction of the sealing code reference are orthogonal to each other. The direction of the management code reference indicates the direction in which the resistor 541 is disposed, and the direction of the sealing code reference indicates the direction in which the resistor 542 is disposed.

As shown in FIG. 57 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the management code reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the left side of the management code reference.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 sends the management code 5208 (management number seal 5207) to the worker.
, The position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 can be grasped, and the resistor 5
The ease of confirmation of 41 is improved. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

Also, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the sealing code reference. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing the left side of the sealing code reference.

Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 can cause the operator to grasp the position of the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 by checking the sealing cord 5253 (sealing seal 5252), and the resistor 542
The ease of confirmation is improved. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

Note that the type identification of the game control device by the management code 5208, the soundness confirmation by the sealing code 5253 (or the validity confirmation of the sealing seal 5252), and the confirmation of the game control board 510 are closely related. Using the management code 5208 and the sealing code 5253 as a reference is easy for the operator to understand.

[Modification 2 of the second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment is different from the board box 520 of the second embodiment in that the positions of the engaging portion and the locking portion are reversed.

First, the game control device 100 supported by the front frame 12 according to the second modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of the game control device of Modification 2 of the second embodiment and an attachment base that supports the game control device with a front frame.

The front frame 12 includes an attachment base 550, and the game control device 10 is provided via the attachment base 550.
0 is supported. The game control device 100 houses the game control board 510 in the board box 551. The substrate box 551 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and includes an engaging portion 552 on the long side that is the upper side, and an engaging portion 553 that is on the opposite side that is the lower side. The mounting base 550 has a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly larger than the board box 551, includes engaged portions 553 a and 553 b corresponding to the engaging portions 553, and locked portions 552 a corresponding to the locking portions 552. Is provided.

The board box 551 first engages the engaging portion 553 and the engaged portions 553a and 553b, and then places the engaging portion 553 on the mounting base 550 using the engaging portion 553 as a rotation shaft, and the locking portion 552 By being locked to the locked portion 552a, it is fixed to the mounting base 550. The substrate box 551
Is attached to the attachment base 550, the board box 551 requires an operation of engaging the engaging portion 553 and the engaged portions 553a and 553b first. Therefore, the engaging portion 553 has a side surface as a work starting point of the mounting work of the board box 551 for the worker who performs the maintenance work of the gaming machine 10.

The connector 530a faces the outside of the board box 551 from a window portion that is an opening provided in the board box 551 (upper member), and can be connected to a predetermined harness. Note that the game control board 510 suppresses the harness from being an obstacle to observing the component mounting surface by disposing the connector 530a on the upper side. Moreover, the game control board 510 arrange | positions the connector 530a above, and a harness inhibits the visibility of the latching | locking part 552. FIG. Such a game control device 100 obstructs the operability of a third party who intends to perform an illegal operation.

Next, the mounting of resistors (resistors) on the game control board 510 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of the game control board of Modification 2 of the second embodiment and the direction of resistance mounted on the game control board.

A game control board 510 shown in FIG. 59 (1) includes a required number of connectors 530a and 530b on a component mounting surface and a required number of resistors 541 and 542 on a component mounting surface in a required direction. The game control board 510 is accommodated in the board box 551 and supported by the front frame 12 with the locking part 552 of the board box 551 on the upper side and the engaging part 553 on the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 59 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 toward the left side of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 facing the open side of the front frame 12.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the resistance 541 of the worker who opens the front frame 12 and performs the maintenance inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 59 (3), the resistor 542 includes a first color band 543 and a substrate box 55.
The fourth color band 546 is directed toward the locking portion 552 side of the substrate box 551 toward the one engaging portion 553 side.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 resists the worker based on the engaging portion 553 that is a work starting point when the board box 551 is attached to the front frame 12 when the front frame 12 is opened and maintenance inspection work is performed. 542 can be confirmed. That is, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

[Modification 3 of the second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment has a reset SW as compared with the game control board 510 of the second embodiment.
Is different on the substrate. The mounting of the resistor (resistor) on the game control board according to the third modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of the game control board of Modification 3 of the second embodiment and the direction of resistance mounted on the game control board.

The game control board 555 shown in FIG. 60 (1) includes the required number of connectors 530a and 530b on the component mounting surface and the required number of resistors 541 and 542 on the component mounting surface in the required orientation. Further, the game control board 555 includes a reset SW 556 at one corner of the rectangular board. For example, the game control board 555 includes a reset SW 556 at the lower left corner of the board.
The lower left corner of the board is the open end side of the front frame 12 and is a position where the reset SW 556 is excellent in operability, and the harness connected to the connector 530a is connected to the reset SW 55.
6 is a position where the operability of 6 is not hindered.

The resistor 541 is a resistor disposed in a direction along the left-right direction of the front frame 12. Resistor 542
Is a resistance arranged in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction of the front frame 12, that is, a direction along the vertical direction of the front frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 60 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side of the front frame 12. That is, the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 in the direction in which the reset SW 556 is present on the game control board 555. Therefore, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 541 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 directed in the direction where the reset SW 556 is present. In other words, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 541 so that the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 is directed in a direction where the reset SW 556 is not present.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 opens the front frame 12 to an operator who performs maintenance and inspection work.
The reset SW 556 is provided as a suitable mark, and the ease of confirmation of the resistor 541 is improved. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 555.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 60 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 to the lower side of the front frame 12. That is, the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 in the direction in which the reset SW 556 is present on the game control board 555. Therefore, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing the reset SW 556. In other words, the game control board 555 mounts the resistor 542 so that the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 542 faces in the direction where the reset SW 556 is not present.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 opens the front frame 12 to an operator who performs maintenance and inspection work.
The reset SW 556 is provided as a suitable mark, and the ease of confirmation of the resistor 542 is improved. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 555.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the resistance 542 of the operator. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 555.

In the third modification of the second embodiment, the reset SW 556 is exemplified as a reference component for grasping the directions of the resistors 541 and 542. However, as long as the reset SW 556 is provided at one corner of a rectangular substrate. Other parts may be used as reference parts.

Further, the third modification of the second embodiment has been described by exemplifying the lower left corner of the substrate as one corner of the rectangular substrate, but the upper left corner, the upper right portion, the lower right portion, etc. It may be.

In addition, although the game control board 510 was illustrated and demonstrated about 2nd Embodiment, the production control board 511, other various control boards (for example, payout control board), a relay board (for example, the relay board 70), The present invention can also be applied to other substrates (for example, LED substrates and sensor substrates).

In the second embodiment, the game control board 510 is exemplified, and instead of the resistors 541 and 542, the resistor 549 and the capacitors 551 and 556 may be mounted. However, the second embodiment The same can be applied to the modified example. In the second embodiment (
In addition to the resistors 541 and 542, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example includes a resistor 549 and a capacitor 55.
1,556 may be mounted, and different types of components may be mounted in a mixed manner. Even if different parts are mixed, the gaming machine 10 can improve the ease of confirmation of parts according to the above-described arrangement rules.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modification) described above has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a main body frame (outer frame 11), a front frame (front frame 12) that can be opened and closed with one of the left and right sides of the main body frame as a rotation axis, and a component mounting surface that is visible. Substrate supported by the frame (
For example, the game control board 510). When a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) that displays a rating by a color code is mounted in the left-right direction, the substrate sets the first color band of the color code to the open end side of the front frame (see FIG. 50).

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a housing case (for example, a board box 551) that houses a board with a component mounting surface visible. The accommodating case engages with a front frame (for example, engaged portions 553a and 553b included in the mounting base 550 of the front frame 12) on one side along the left-right direction (for example, the lower side of the front frame 12). (E.g., engaging portion 553) and a mechanism that engages with the front frame (e.g., the locked portion 552a included in the mounting base 550 of the front frame 12) on the other side along the left-right direction with the engaging portion as a rotation axis. A stop portion (for example, a locking portion 552). The substrate is a passive element (for example, a resistor 542) in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the horizontal direction.
Is mounted, the first color band of the color code is set to the engaging portion side (see FIGS. 58 and 59).

(3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a housing case (for example, a board box 520) that houses a board with a component mounting surface visible. The housing case has a front frame (for example, an engaged portion 52 provided in the mounting base 521 of the front frame 12) on one side (upper side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction.
2a, 522b) and an engaging portion (for example, engaging portion 522) and a front frame (for example, the mounting base 521 of the front frame 12) on the other side along the left-right direction with the engaging portion as a rotation axis. A locking portion (for example, a locking portion 523) that is locked to the locked portion 523a). When a passive element (for example, a resistor 542) is mounted in a direction orthogonal to the left-right direction (vertical direction), the substrate sets the first color band of the color code to the locking portion side (see FIG. 51).

(4) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a housing case (for example, a board box 520) that houses a board with a component mounting surface visible. The accommodation case accommodates the board with a plurality of connectors (for example, the connector 530a) on the board facing one side (upper side of the front frame 12) along the left-right direction. When a passive element (for example, a resistor 542) is mounted in a direction orthogonal to the horizontal direction (vertical direction), the substrate is placed on the other side of the color code along the horizontal direction (the lower side of the front frame 12). (See FIG. 50).

(5) When the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) is mounted in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the left-right direction, the substrate of (1) uses the first color band of the color code as the front frame (front frame 12). ) (See FIG. 50).

(6) The gaming machine 10 of (5) includes a housing case (for example, a board box 520) that houses a board with a component mounting surface visible. The accommodation case accommodates the board with a plurality of connectors (for example, connector 530a) on the board facing the upper side of the front frame (see FIG. 48).

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular board (for example, the game control board 510) and a housing case (for example, the board box 520) that houses the board with the component mounting surface visible. The housing case includes a base portion (for example, the lower member 5202) that supports the substrate, a cover portion (for example, the upper member 5201) that covers the substrate from the component mounting surface and engages the base portion, and the base portion and the cover. And a sealing portion (for example, a sealing portion 525) that seals the engagement relationship with the body portion. The board
A passive element (for example, a resistor 541) that displays a rating by a color code is oriented in parallel to one side (for example, the right side of the game control board 510 illustrated in FIG. 53) (for example, the top and bottom of the front frame 12). When mounting in the direction), the first color band of the color code is set to the left side (for example, the reference side left side of the sealing portion) when the sealing portion is viewed downward (see FIGS. 48 and 53).

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular board (for example, the game control board 510) and a housing case (for example, the board box 520) that houses the board with the component mounting surface visible. The housing case is a first case portion (for example, the upper member 5201) that covers the component mounting surface of the board.
A second case portion (for example, lower member 5202) that engages with the first case portion, and a sealing portion (for example, sealing) that seals the engagement relationship between the first case portion and the second case portion Part 525). The board has a passive element (for example, a resistor 541) displaying a rating by a color code in a direction parallel to one side (for example, the right side of the game control board 510 illustrated in FIG. 53) (for example, the front frame). 12 in the vertical direction), the first color band of the color code is set to the left side (for example, the reference side left side of the sealing portion) when the sealing portion is viewed downward (see FIGS. 48 and 53).
.

(9) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular board (for example, the game control board 510) and a housing case (for example, the board box 520) that houses the board with the component mounting surface visible. The housing case has a base portion (for example, the lower member 5202) that supports the substrate, a cover portion (for example, the upper member 5201) that covers the substrate from the component mounting surface and engages the base portion, and one orientation ( For example, the management number vote (for example, the direction of the front frame 12 in the left-right direction) (for example,
The control number seal 5206) and a sealing slip (for example, a seal) pasted in a direction orthogonal to one direction (for example, the vertical direction of the front frame 12) are engaged with the base unit and the cover unit. And a sealing portion (for example, a sealing portion 525) that is sealed by a stop seal 5251). When the board is mounted with a passive element (for example, resistor 541) that displays a rating by a color code in one direction, the first color band of the color code is seen on the left side (for example, the When the passive element (for example, the resistor 542) is mounted in a direction orthogonal to one direction, the first color band of the color code is viewed on the left side (for example, sealing) The seal reference is on the left side (see FIG. 54).

(10) Each of the management number slip and the sealing slip in (9) indicates a normal position by a character string to be displayed (for example, a main board management number, a character “unopening”, etc.) (see FIG. 54).
(11) The management number slip and the sealing slip in (9) each indicate the normal position by image display (for example, two-dimensional code, design, etc.) (see FIG. 57).

(12) The image display of (11) is a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 57).
(13) The gaming machine 10 includes a rectangular board (game control board 510) including a processor (for example, the processor 532) and an inspection terminal (for example, the connector 530b) that is used for inspection and not used for game control. Prepare. The board is mounted with a processor and an inspection terminal provided with offsets (offsets d1 and d2) in the vertical and horizontal directions, and passive elements (for example, resistors 541 and 542) that display ratings by color codes are arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions. When a plurality of devices are mounted in a vertical direction, a passive element (for example, a resistor 542) mounted in a vertical direction and a passive element (for example, a resistor 542) mounted in a horizontal direction (
For example, for each of the resistors 541), the direction in which the inspection terminal is located with respect to the processor is the direction in which the first color band of the color code is located (see FIG. 52).

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the orientation of components mounted between the integrated circuit and the connector on the board is aligned in a specific direction in the positional relationship between the integrated circuit and the connector. First, a board arrangement environment in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement relationship of integrated circuits, connectors, and resistors on the game control board according to the third embodiment, and a direction of a resistor mounted on the game control board. In addition, about the structure similar to 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, a code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61 (1), the gaming machine 10 mounts an integrated circuit 560 and connectors 561, 562, and 563 on the board mounting surface of the game control board 510. The integrated circuit 560 is a rectangular IC package having one side as a longitudinal direction when viewed from the front. For example, a driver IC for an input signal
(More specifically, the integrated circuit 560 is an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121). The integrated circuit 560 is an example of an integrated circuit mounted on the game control board 510, and may be a driver IC for an output signal, a required control circuit, a buffer circuit, a port expander, or the like.

The connectors 561, 562, and 563 are connectors for inputting / outputting signals input / output by the integrated circuit 560 to the outside. The connectors 561, 562, 563 and the integrated circuit 560 are opposed to each other with the component arrangement region 566 interposed therebetween.

In the component placement area 566, a linear resistor 541 (linear shape parts: for example, part numbers R22 and R21) is placed on the integrated circuit 560 side from the line TL, and the connector 561 is placed from the line TL.
Linear resistors 542 (line-shaped parts: for example, part numbers R15, R3,
R2). The resistor 541 is arranged in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the integrated circuit 560 (the left-right direction in the drawing), and the resistor 542 is arranged in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the integrated circuit 560 (the up-down direction in the drawing). In other words, the resistor 542 includes the integrated circuit 560 and the connector 561.
562 and 563 are arranged in the direction (vertical direction in the figure), and the resistor 541 is integrated circuit 56.
0 and the connectors 561, 562, and 563 are arranged in a direction orthogonal to the direction connecting the connectors 561, 562, and 563 (the left-right direction in the figure).

The game control board 510 is a multilayer board (for example, a two-layer board), and the connector 56
1, 562, 563 and the integrated circuit 560 are connected through the resistor 542, the first layer (
For example, when the wiring pattern is passed through the component mounting surface) and the connectors 561, 562, 563 and the integrated circuit 560 are connected via the resistor 541, the wiring pattern is passed through the second layer (for example, the solder surface).

Thereby, the game control board 510 facilitates the routing of the wiring pattern passing through the resistor 541 and the wiring pattern passing through the resistor 542. Further, the game control board 510 divides the component arrangement area 566 and aligns the directions of the resistors 541 and 542, thereby facilitating component confirmation. Also,
Since the game control board 510 divides the component arrangement area 566 and aligns the directions of the resistors 541 and 542, it is easy to secure a display area for the component number.

Note that the game control board 510 has exemplified the resistors 541 and 542 as an example of the mounted components. However, instead of the resistors 541 and 542, or other components having a mounting direction in addition to the resistors 541 and 542, the component placement region 566 is used. You may implement in.

Further, the game control board 510 may limit the orientation of components in a component placement region between all integrated circuits and all connectors, or may limit only a part thereof. . For example, the connectors 561 and 562 are connected to the start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a.
, A connector connected to the start port 2 switch 37a), the presence of which is clearly indicated by the fluorescent color. The game control board 510 may set a component placement area between the connectors 561 and 562 that require attention as such a fraud monitoring target and the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the resistor 541 directs the first color band 543 to the left side. Therefore, the game control board 510 places the first color band 543 of the resistor 541 on the left side (the front frame 12).
The resistor 541 is mounted toward the open side. In other words, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 541 with the fourth color band 546 of the resistor 541 facing the right side (the shaft support side of the front frame 12).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the resistor 542 directs the first color band 543 downward. Therefore, the game control board 510 mounts the resistor 542 with the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 facing downward (the lower side of the front frame 12). In other words, the game control board 510 is connected to the resistor 542.
The resistor 542 is mounted with the fourth color band 546 facing upward (above the front frame 12).

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirmation of the resistances 541 and 542 of the worker who performs maintenance and inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

Next, a setting example of the line TL will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the line TL according to the third embodiment.
A line TL shown in FIG. 62 (1) is set so as to pass through the lower end of the through hole 564 into which the lead wire on the lower side of the resistor 542 (on the integrated circuit 560 side) is inserted. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 closer to the resistor 542 than the line TL. Line T
L is not limited to the lower end of the through hole 564 but may be set between the upper end and the lower end of the through hole 564.

The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (2) is set so as to pass through the lower end (on the integrated circuit 560 side) of the main body of the resistor 542 (excluding the lead wire). At this time, the game control board 510 is connected to the line TL.
The part number 548 is displayed on the resistor 542 side. The line TL may be set between the lower end of the main body of the resistor 542 and the upper end of the through hole 564.

The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (3) is below the first color band 543 of the resistor 542 (the integrated circuit 5
60 side) and set to a position overlapping the main body of the resistor 542. At this time, the game control board 510 displays the part number 548 closer to the resistor 542 than the line TL.

The line TL shown in FIG. 62 (4) is set at a position spaced apart by a distance d from the lower end (BL) of the through hole 564 into which the lead wire on the lower side (integrated circuit 560) of the resistor 542 is inserted. . At this time, the game control board 510 has a part number 54 on the resistance 542 side from the line TL.
8 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 62 (5), the game control board 510 has a resistance 54 higher than that of the line TL.
The part number 548 may be displayed on the second side so as to contact the line TL. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (6), the game control board 510 has a part number 5 across the line TL.
48 may be displayed.

The line TL is a virtual line that can be recognized by components mounted on the game control board 510, through holes, patterns, silk printing (part number display, etc.). It may be a real line clearly indicated by a solid line or a broken line, or a real line clearly indicated by printing or sticking on the substrate box 520.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a modification of the third embodiment will be described. A gaming machine 10 according to a modification of the third embodiment arranges a component placement region and a non-component placement region between an integrated circuit and a connector on a board. The component placement area and the non-part placement area will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an example of a component placement region and a non-component placement region located between an integrated circuit and a connector on a game control board according to a modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example of an AA cross section of a game control device according to a modification of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 10 that houses a game control board 510 in a board box 520.
0, integrated circuit 560 and connectors 561, 56 on the board mounting surface of game control board 510
2,563 is implemented.

The game control board 510 sets the component placement region 566 and the non-component placement region 565 side by side between the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, and 563. The component placement region 566 is located on the integrated circuit 560 side, and the non-component placement region 565 is the connectors 561, 562, 56.
Located on the 3rd side. The component placement area 566 displays the resistor 542, and the non-component placement area 565 displays a part number 548 corresponding to the resistor 542.

The integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542 and the resistor 542 and the connector 561 are electrically connected through a pattern 572 provided on the solder surface of the substrate 570. That is, the game control board 5
10 does not have a pattern on the component mounting surface of the substrate 570 for electrically connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542 and between the resistor 542 and the connector 561.

The integrated circuit 560 and the resistor 542 are housed in the substrate box 520 and protected from the outside. On the other hand, the connector 561 faces to the outside through an opening 567 provided in the board box 520 so that a required harness can be connected to the connector.

The board box 520 has a predetermined gap on various components to accommodate various components (for example, the integrated circuit 560, the resistor 542, etc.). On the other hand, the substrate box 520 has an opening 567.
In the vicinity, it is close to the game control board 510. Therefore, the board box 520 has an upright wall 568 between an area (component arrangement area 566) for accommodating various components and the opening 567. The standing wall 568 is in the range of the non-component placement region 565.

Since the non-component placement region 565 includes a standing wall 568, the game control board 510 has the standing wall 5.
In the vicinity of 68, the visibility of the part number display may be insufficient. Therefore, the game control board 5
10 is a component (for example, an integrated circuit 560, a resistor 542) in the range of the component placement region 566.
Etc.) are displayed in the range of the region 5651, the component numbers corresponding to various connectors (for example, the connector 561) are displayed in the range of the region 5653, and the display of the component numbers in the range of the region 5562 is restricted. .

Here, the part number display of the modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a part number display according to a modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a component number display according to a modification of the third embodiment.

In the part number display shown in FIG. 65 (1), the part number 573 corresponding to the resistor 542 is displayed in the same direction as the resistor 542 in the region 5651 of the non-component placement region 565, and the region 565 is displayed.
3, a connector number 574 (part number) corresponding to the connector 561 is assigned to the connector 561.
Are displayed in the same direction (orthogonal to the resistor 542), and the part number display in the area 5562 is not displayed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the parts and part numbers of the worker who performs the maintenance inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

In the part number display shown in FIG. 65 (2), the part number 575 is displayed in the area 5651 of the non-part placement area 565, and the part number 576 is displayed across the area 5651 and the area 5562. However, the part number 576 is a number part (number “15”) having a large discriminating power in relation to an adjacent part number and displayed in a region 5651 and a character part having a small discriminating power (characters) “R”) is displayed in the area 5652. Thus, the gaming machine 10
Can ensure a certain discriminating power of the part number 576 while sacrificing part of the visibility of the part number 576. Further, the gaming machine 10 can improve the degree of freedom of the display position of other part numbers (for example, the part number 575) by sacrificing part of the visibility of the part number 576. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 improves the ease of confirming the parts and part numbers of the worker who performs the maintenance inspection work. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the discovery of fraud against the game control board 510.

66 (1) shows a part of the AA cross section of the game control apparatus shown in FIG.
65) It is an enlarged view. The substrate box 520 can be deformed by receiving an external force from the outside. At that time, the rising wall corner 580 of the board box 520 can come into contact with the game control board 510.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), the game control board 510 arranges the pattern 582 on the solder surface while avoiding the component mounting surface in the region 581 directly below the rising wall corner 580 where the rising wall corner 580 can contact. Accordingly, the game control board 510 prevents the game control board 510 from being faulty and malfunctioning due to the external force received from the outside of the board box 520.

Further, in the game control board 510, when the pattern 583 cannot be disposed on the solder surface while avoiding the component mounting surface in the region 581 directly below the standing wall corner portion, that is, when the pattern 583 is disposed on the component mounting surface, A part number 58 on the pattern 583 in the region 581 directly below the part
4 is displayed. Since the part number 584 has a certain thickness by silk printing or the like, the pattern 583 can be protected.

Accordingly, the game control board 510 prevents the game control board 510 from being faulty and malfunctioning due to the external force received from the outside of the board box 520.
In addition, although the game control board 510 was illustrated and demonstrated about 3rd Embodiment, the production control board 511, other various control boards (for example, payout control board), a relay board (for example, the relay board 70), The present invention can also be applied to other substrates (for example, LED substrates and sensor substrates).

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including modifications) has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a control board (for example, a game) that includes an integrated circuit (for example, an integrated circuit 560) and connectors (for example, connectors 561, 562, 563) that can connect signals input and output by the integrated circuit. A control board 510). The control board is provided in a connector side region located on the connector side among a plurality of passive elements (for example, resistors 541 and 542) mounted in a region between the integrated circuit and the connector (for example, in the component placement region 566). The direction of the passive element to be mounted is the first direction connecting the integrated circuit and the connector (for example, the direction connecting the integrated circuit 560 and the connectors 561, 562, 563), and is mounted in the integrated circuit side region located on the integrated circuit side. A second direction (eg, integrated circuit 56) that is orthogonal to the first direction.
0 and a direction perpendicular to the direction connecting the connectors 561, 562, and 563).

(2) The connector side region of (1) is a region located on the connector side of the predetermined line in the region between the integrated circuit and the connector, and the integrated circuit side region is located on the integrated circuit side of the predetermined line. It is an area to do.

(3) The predetermined line in (2) is a line specified on the control board (for example, an actual line by silk printing or the like).
(4) The predetermined line in (2) is an indefinite line on the control board (for example, a virtual line that can be recognized from a mounted component or the like).

(5) The gaming machine 10 includes a control board (for example, a game) including an integrated circuit (for example, the integrated circuit 560) and connectors (for example, connectors 561, 562, 563) to which signals input / output by the integrated circuit can be connected. A control board 510). The control board is an integrated circuit side region (for example, a component placement region 56) located on the integrated circuit side in the region between the integrated circuit and the connector.
6) A passive element (for example, resistor 542) is mounted, and passive element information (for example, part number 548) regarding the passive element is displayed in a connector side area (for example, non-component placement area 565) located on the connector side.

[Calculation and display of base]
Here, calculation and display of the base as the gaming performance performed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
This will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the base is a payout rate in a normal gaming state. Here, the normal game state is a state that is neither a short-time state nor a big hit game state (big hit state), and more generally, the probability of a hit result in a special figure display game is a normal probability state (low probability) State). The payout rate is the number of payout balls per 100 outballs. Therefore, the number of out balls in the normal game state is Nout, and the number of payout balls in the normal game state is Ns.
In the case of afe, the base B is calculated by the equation B = (Nsafe ÷ Nout) × 100. The number of out balls is the number of balls that have been launched into the game area and entered the out mouth or the winning opening (for example, the number of balls counted based on the above-mentioned out ball detection switch signal). Sometimes called out. The number of payout balls is the number of prize balls paid out for winning, and may be called the number of payouts, the number of safe balls, or simply safe.

As already described in the description of FIG. 3, the game control device 100 of the gaming machine 10 includes the status display device 13.
5 is provided. 67 is a diagram showing a status display device 135 as a base display means and a storage area for the base. FIG. 67 (1) shows a display unit of the status display device 135, and FIG.
(2) shows a storage area for the base. FIG. 68 shows a display example by the status display device 135.

As shown in FIG. 67 (1), the status display device 135 is composed of four-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side. A dot point (small circular light emission) is displayed at the lower right of each 7-segment LED. Part). 4-digit 7-segment LED for base display
The left two digits are the identification seg that displays the base measurement time (whether or not the measurement is in progress and the order of measurement), and the right two digits are the ratio seg that displays the base value. ing. As shown in FIG. 68, the 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 actually displays “B” in the form of a small letter “b”.

The game control device 100 (specifically, the CPU 111A as a control unit) is a RAM 111C.
The storage area for the base as shown in FIG. 67 (2) is set in the RWM, and used for the calculation of the base and the display of the base. In other words, the game control device 100 sets the “out ball number” for storing the cumulative value of the out ball number and the “paid out ball number” for storing the cumulative value of the payout ball number as the base calculation storage area. In addition, “base (BL)”, “base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, and “base (B3)” are set as base storage areas for storing the base calculation values.

Here, “base (BL)” is an area for storing the base being measured.
) "Is an area for storing the base measured one time before," Base (B2) "is an area for storing the base measured two times before, and" Base (B3) "is measured three times before This is an area for storing the base. In other words, the oldest base measurement value (calculated value) is stored in the storage area in which “base (B3)” is set.

Note that the storage values in the base calculation storage area and the base storage area described above are backed up and stored when the power is turned off, and when the RAM is cleared (except when the RWM is abnormal), the power is turned on by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. It is desirable that the memory is held without being cleared to zero.

The game control device 100 uses the status display device 135 except for the case where the setting content of the probability setting (any one of the five levels) is displayed by the status display device 135 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described above. Display the base. In the first embodiment described above, the mode in which the setting contents of the probability setting are displayed by the probability setting value display device 136 has been described. However, the probability setting value display device 136 may be deleted, and the state display device 135 may function as the probability setting value display device. In this case, the state display device 13
5 displays the setting contents in each mode, and otherwise displays the base by the status display device 135.

The game control apparatus 100 performs the calculation and display of the base as an example as follows. That is, the game control device 100 first confirms all segments (including dot points) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 at the time of power-on, for a predetermined time (for example, 5
Blink for a second).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 displays the BL display state as shown in FIG.
), The B1 display state as shown in FIG. 68, the B2 display state as shown in FIG. 68 (3), and the B3 display state as shown in FIG. 68 (4) are each repeatedly executed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). To do. That is, in the steady state after power-on, the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B2 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then B3
The display state is maintained for a predetermined time, the BL display state is then maintained for a predetermined time, the B1 display state is then maintained for a predetermined time, and the four states are sequentially switched and repeated.

Here, in the BL display state, the game control apparatus 100 displays “bL” (BL) indicating that the measurement time of the base is being measured (current) in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area “base” in the ratio segment. (BL) "value (or"-") is displayed. In the B1 display state, the game control apparatus 100 displays “b1” (B1) indicating that the base measurement time is one time before in the identification segment, and the base storage area “base (B1) in the ratio segment. ”Value (or“--”). Further, in the B2 display state, the game control device 100 has a measurement time of 2 based on the identification segment.
“B2” (B2) indicating the previous time is displayed, and the value (or “−−”) of the base storage area “base (B2)” is displayed in the ratio segment. In addition, the game control device 1 in the B3 display state
00 displays “b3” (B3) indicating that the base measurement time is three times before in the identification segment, and the value of the base storage area “base (B3)” in the ratio segment (or “-”). ) Is displayed.

On the other hand, for the calculation of the base, the game control device 100, after starting, for example, every time an out ball is detected in the normal gaming state (that is, every time an out ball detection switch signal is output), The memory value of the “out ball number” is increased by a value corresponding to the number of detected out balls, and each time there is a winning in the winning ball of the gaming ball in the normal gaming state (or a winning ball based on the winning occurs) Corresponding to the number of payout balls (or the number of prize balls actually paid out detected based on a signal from the payout control device 200) for which the stored value of “number of payout balls” in the base calculation storage area is generated Increase by the value you want. Further, the game control device 100 calculates the base B by the above-described formula every time the stored value of “number of out balls” or “number of paid-out balls” in the base calculation storage area changes, for example, Overwrite the “base (BL)” in the base storage area as the latest value.

The game control device 100 determines that one measurement is completed when the stored value of “number of out balls” in the base calculation storage area reaches a specified measurement number (for example, 60000), the following measurement is performed. It is configured to perform processing at the end. In the process at the end of the measurement, the value of the base storage area “base (B2)” at that time is used as the base storage area “base (B3)”.
And the value of the base storage area “base (B1)” at that time is overwritten with the base storage area “
Overwrite the base (B2) ”, overwrite the value of the base storage area“ base (BL) ”at that point in the base storage area“ base (B1) ”, The stored values of “Number” and “Number of balls to be paid out” are cleared and reset to zero. As a result, the base value up to three times before and the base value currently being measured are always stored and held.

When the game control device 100 is turned on for the first time, the base calculation storage area “number of out balls”
In the period A in which the storage value of the base calculation storage area “number of out balls” is less than a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300) in each display state, The characters indicating the base measurement time, such as “bL”, “b1”, etc., are blinking displayed. In the ratio segment, as shown in FIG. 68 (4), “-” (the state in which only the center horizontally long segment is lit) is displayed. Display and notify that it is in an unmeasured state.

Next, when the storage value of the base calculation storage area “number of out balls” reaches a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300), the game control device 100 sets the base calculation storage area and the base storage area. Initialization (zero clear) starts the first measurement.

Then, the game control device 100 determines the identification segment in the BL display state during the period B from the start of the first measurement until the stored value of the base calculation storage area “number of out balls” reaches the measured number (for example, 60000). “BL” blinks or lights up, and the ratio segment displays the value of the base storage area “base (BL)”. In period B, other display states (
(B1-B3 display state), in the identification segment, characters indicating the measurement time of the base such as “b1”... Are flashed, and in the ratio segment, “-” is displayed to notify that the measurement is not performed.

The display of “bL” in the identification segment in the BL display state is the base calculation storage area “
When the stored value of the “out ball count” is less than the measured number, the display is blinking, and when the stored value of the base calculation storage area “out ball count” reaches the measured number, the display is turned on. The blinking cycle of the blinking display in the identification segment and the ratio segment is, for example, a 0.6 second cycle, of which, for example, the lighting is 0.3 seconds and the lighting is 0.3 seconds. Further, when the stored value of “out ball number” reaches the measurement number (for example, 60000) and the period B ends, the above-described processing at the end of the measurement is performed, and the next second measurement is started.

After that, the game control device 100, like the period B in which the first measurement is performed, refers to the period C in which the second measurement is performed, the period D in which the third measurement is performed, the period E in which the fourth measurement is performed,. The measurement is performed continuously. After the third measurement is completed, since the calculated values of the last three bases are stored, in all of the B1 to B3 display states, the base measurement time such as “b1”. In the ratio segment, the value of the corresponding storage area for base (any one of “base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, and “base (B3)”) is displayed.

68 (1) to (4) show an example of specific display in each display state in the period D after the end of the second measurement. In this case, there is no measurement result three times before,
In FIG. 68 (4), which is a specific example of the B3 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “−−” (display indicating the unmeasured state).

In FIG. 68 (1), which is a specific example of the BL display state, the ratio segment display is “5 8”.
It is shown that the real-time base value currently being measured is 58.
In FIG. 68 (2), which is a specific example of the B1 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “6 7”, and the base value is 67 for the specified number of measurements measured one time before. It is shown that. Further, in FIG. 68 (3), which is a specific example of the B2 display state, the display of the ratio segment is “
4 9 ”, and the base value for the specified number of measurements measured two times before is 49
It is shown that. When the base value is 100 or more, the ratio segment display is “9 9.” (the number 99 is displayed in the ratio segment and the dot point of the last digit is lit), so that it is 100 or more. Notify that.

The base value is generally in the range of about 25 to 35, for example, and is normal even if it is smaller than this range or larger than this range. This abnormality is called base abnormality. The display example of FIG. 68 described above shows an example in which the measurement results of the base abnormality exceeding the normal range are continuous, and when normal, the numerical value within the normal range of about 25 to 35 is displayed in the identification segment. Is displayed.

The game control device 100, for example, has measured the base three measured values (B described above) stored in the base storage area (“base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, “base (B3)”).
1 to B3 display state ratio segment display values) are all out of the normal range and abnormal.
Assuming that a base abnormality has occurred, a signal indicating that a base abnormality has occurred is transmitted to an external game hall internal management device (hall computer), for example.

The signal (information) indicating the base abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a command, for example, and the base abnormality is notified to the display area of the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 300 that has received this signal. An image (for example, an error notification image) may be displayed. Further, since this base abnormality may occur when fraud is performed, it is desirable to set the above-mentioned strong error.

In the example shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the base measurement value is stored and displayed up to the past three times, but the number of base storage areas is increased and stored and displayed up to the past four or more times. The structure to do may be sufficient. In addition, although the base calculation storage area is set only for measurement, a storage area may be provided for storing the number of out balls and the number of payout balls, which are the basis for calculation of past measurement values. Good.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The game control device of the fourth embodiment includes a game control board that can be easily confirmed by visual inspection. The game control board is illustrated and explained as a board that can be easily confirmed by visual inspection, but can also be applied to other boards such as a production control board, a payout control board, a power supply board, a relay board, a sensor board, and a lamp board. It is. First, the game control device of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of the game control device according to the fourth embodiment.

Like the game control device 100, the game control device 100a is supported by the front frame 12 via the mounting base 521 (see FIG. 48). The game control device 100a includes a board box 520 similar to the game control device 100 of the second embodiment, and the game control device 10 of the second embodiment.
A game control board 600 different from 0 is accommodated in the board box 520. The substrate box 520 has a substantially rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, and includes an engaging portion 522 on the upper long side and a locking portion 523 on the opposite side on the lower side. The mounting base 521 has a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly larger than the board box 520, and includes engaged portions 522 a and 522 b corresponding to the engaging portions 522, and locked portions 523 a corresponding to the locking portions 523. Is provided.

The board box 520 first engages the engaging portion 522 and the engaged portions 522a and 522b, and places the engaging portion 522 on the mounting base 521 with the engaging portion 522 as a rotation shaft, and then the locking portion 523. By being locked to the locked portion 523a, the mounting base 521 is fixed. The board box 520 includes an upper member 5201 and a lower member 5202 as main structures, and the game control board 600 is held between the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202 (see FIG. 49).

A caulking portion 524 (for example, a screw) caulks the upper member 5201 and the lower member 5202. The caulking unit 524 enables switching between the caulking state and the caulking cancellation state for a predetermined number of times, leaving a trace. In addition, the substrate box 520 includes a sealing portion 525, and a sealing seal 525a is affixed thereto so that the presence / absence of opening of the substrate box 520 can be detected by the state of the sealing seal 525a.

The board box 520 has an information display sticker 603 attached to the upper member 5201.
The information display sticker 603 displays necessary information such as a model name, manufacturer name, board management number, and board box opening history. Note that the information display sticker 603 may make it difficult to observe the game control board 600 directly below when viewed from the front, but the game control is performed by changing the observation angle by printing and displaying information on a transparent base material. A blind spot is not generated in the observation of the substrate 600.
Note that ensuring the visibility of the information display sticker 603 also depends on not unnecessarily increasing the area of the information display sticker 603. Further, ensuring the visibility of the information display sticker 603 also depends on securing a gap between the information display sticker 603 and the game control board 600.

The game control board 600 is a rectangular (for example, rectangular) glass epoxy board. The game control board 600 is a two-layer board in which a conductor pattern is formed on the front surface and the back surface, the front surface is a component mounting surface, and the back surface is a solder surface. The game control board 600 includes screw holes 602 at the four corners, and is screwed into the lower member 5202 through the screw holes 602.

Further, the game control board 600 includes an information display area on at least one of the component mounting surface and the solder surface. For example, the game control board 600 has an information display area 60 on the component mounting surface.
1 is provided. The information display area 601 is an area for displaying necessary information regarding the game control board 600 such as a model name, a manufacturer name, and a board management number.

The information display area 601 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the information display sticker 603 in front view. According to another aspect, the information display sticker 603 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the information display area 601 when viewed from the front. That is, the game control apparatus 100a arranges the information display area 601 and the information display sticker 603 at a position that does not overlap in front view. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 ensures the visibility of the information display area 601 in a state where the game control device 100a is supported on the front frame 12. Since the information display area 601 displays information useful for checking the game control board 600, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to check the information display area 601 so that the game control board 6
00 or the game control device 100a can be easily confirmed.

Next, the front and back surfaces of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
It is a figure which shows an example of the surface of a game control board of 4th Embodiment, and a back surface. Note that the game control board 600 includes necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface although not shown. For example, the game control board 600 includes connectors 530a and 530b, resistors 541 and 541 shown in FIGS.
542, a processor 532, and the like are provided on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 70 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 600, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 600 has an information display area 601 (indicated by hatching), a screw hole 602a and a G on the surface.
It has an ND pattern 604 (indicated by vertical line hatching).

The information display area 601 displays control board information related to the game control board 600. The information display area 601 displays control board information by a conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 604 based on a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 601 is rectangular and is provided with one side thereof in contact with one side of the game control board 600. Thereby, the game control board 600 suppresses that the GND pattern 604 loops around the outer periphery of the information display area 601 and the arrangement of the information display area 601 becomes a noise source. Note that the game control board 600 does not need to be provided in contact with one side of the game control board 600 as long as noise due to the arrangement of the information display area 601 can be overlooked. That is,
The game control board 600 may be placed on the information display area 601 surrounded by the GND pattern 604. Further, the information display area 601 may have a shape that is not limited to a rectangle, and for example, corners may be rounded.

The screw hole 602 a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 601. The screw hole 602a is located at the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 600 is observed with the information display area 601 on the lower side. The screw hole 602a is provided in a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 604. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided with two sides of the lower left corner thereof in contact with two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 600. Thereby, the game control board 600 suppresses that the GND pattern 604 loops around the outer periphery of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a and the arrangement of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a becomes a noise source. Note that the game control board 600 is in contact with two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 600 so long as the noise due to the arrangement of the solid-out part around the screw hole 602a can be overlooked. It is not necessary to provide a cutout. In other words, the game control board 600 may be a board that is surrounded by the GND pattern 604 and has a solid portion around the screw hole 602a. Also, the solid portion around the screw hole 602a is
The shape is not limited to a rectangle, and for example, corners may be rounded.

The GND pattern 604 is a GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 604 is provided on the periphery of the information display area 601. As a result, G
The ND pattern 604 has a role of clearly showing the outer edge of the information display area 601 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 601 on the game control board 600. The GND pattern 604 is provided on the periphery of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the solid display portion around the information display area 601 and the screw hole 602a is adjacent to the GND pattern 604, the screw hole 602a is also in the information display area 601 on the game control board 600.
It has a role to clarify the whereabouts. In addition, the shape and size of the GND pattern 604 shown in the figure are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. The GND pattern 604 is displayed in the information display area 6
As long as it is at the peripheral edge of the solid portion around the 01 and the screw hole 602a, it may be more complicated or its size may spread over the entire substrate.

FIG. 70 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 600, that is, the solder surface. Game control board 6
00 has an information display back surface area 601a (indicated by a broken line), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 604a (indicated by vertical line hatching) on the back surface.

The information display back surface area 601 a is an area corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 601. The screw hole 602a is located at the lower right corner when the back surface of the game control board 600 is observed with the information display back surface region 601a (information display region 601) facing down. The GND pattern 604a includes an information display back surface region 601a. That is, the information display back surface area 601a is also a GND pattern (GND solid).

Next, the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to the fourth embodiment. First, the information display position in the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. The information display area 601 is a rectangle having one side along the edge of the game control board 600 as a long side and a side perpendicular to the edge of the game control board 600 as a short side. The information display area 601 has a short side with a width d1, a width d2 on the end side of the game control board 600,
The inner side is bisected by the width d3. In the information display area 601, the end side of the divided area is an information display part 606 a and the inner side is an information non-display part 606 b. The width d2 and the width d3 may be the same or different.

The information display unit 606a has an information display pattern 605 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 605 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 600 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 605 displays the manufacturer (or sales manufacturer) of the game control board 600.

The information non-display portion 606b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and the information display area 6
It functions as a gap that prevents the information display pattern 605 and the GND pattern 604 from approaching each other on the long side of 01. Thereby, the game control board 600 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 605. Such a gaming machine 10 is easy to check the game control board 600.

In addition, the game control board 600 reduces the influence of the information display pattern 605 on the GND pattern 604 as a noise source. From this point of view, the game control board 600 has a width d2
It is desirable to set the information display portion 606a and the information non-display portion 606b with a larger width d3.

Next, FIG. 71 (2) shows details of the information display pattern 605. FIG. Information display pattern 60
5 is formed as a character string by the conductor pattern 605a, and displays that the manufacturer of the game control board 600 is “Kou Co., Ltd.”. The conductor pattern 605a is independent of the GND pattern 604, that is, is insulated. Further, the conductor pattern 605a is independent of the GND pattern 604a, that is, insulated. Thereby, the conductor pattern 605a becomes
Although it can be a noise source, its influence is limited by the information non-display portion 606b.

Next, FIG. 71 (3) shows a modification of the information display pattern 605. FIG. Information display pattern 6
07 is formed as a character string by the conductor pattern 607a, and displays that the manufacturer of the game control board 600 is “Kou Co., Ltd.”. The conductor pattern 607a is independent from the GND pattern 604, that is, insulated.

On the other hand, the conductor pattern 607a has a via 607b and is electrically connected to the GND pattern 604a. Thereby, the conductor pattern 607a limits the property which can become a noise source. The conductor pattern 607a is desirably provided with one or more vias 607b in all of the independent conductor patterns, but may be limited to a part.

Next, a first modification (modification 1) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment. First,
FIG. 72 (1) describes the information display area 611 of the game control board 610. FIG. Note that the game control board 610 differs from the game control board 600 of the fourth embodiment in that it has an information display area 611 instead of the information display area 601, and the same is true for other points.

The information display area 611 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 610 as a long side and a side perpendicular to the end of the game control board 610 as a short side. The information display area 611 has a width d4.
The short side is divided into a width d5 on the inner side of the game control board 610, a width d7 on the end side, and a width d6 between them. The information display area 611 is an information display section 61 in order from the inside of the divided areas.
5a, information display unit 615b, and information display unit 615c. Width d5, width d6, width d7
May be the same or different.

The information display unit 615a has an information display pattern 612 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 612 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 610 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 612 displays a logo of the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 610. The information display unit 615a displays information by removing a conductor pattern based on a solid conductor pattern. Therefore, the information displayed on the information display unit 615a has an aspect of blank pattern formation information formed by blank patterns.

The information non-display portion 615b has an information display pattern 613 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 613 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 610 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 613 displays the name of the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 610. The information display unit 615b displays information by arranging a conductor pattern on a blank base having no conductor pattern. Therefore, the information displayed on the information display unit 615b has a side called conductor pattern formation information formed with a conductor pattern.

The information non-display portion 615c has an information display pattern 614 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 614 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 610 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 614 displays the board management number of the game control board 610.

Note that in the game control board 610, the back surface of the information display unit 615a, the information display unit 615b, and the information display unit 615c may be a solid portion of the conductor pattern or may be a solid portion of the conductor pattern. In addition, the game control board 610 may be formed by combining the solid portion and the solid portion of the conductor pattern on the back surface of the information display portion 615a, the information display portion 615b, and the information display portion 615c. For example, the game control board 610 is connected to the back surface of the information display unit 615a (the information display unit 615a).
The area corresponding to the information display unit 615b can be a solid part, and the back surface of the information display part 615b (the area corresponding to the information display part 615b) can be a solid part. As a result, the game control board 610 has an observation mode for each of the information display unit 615a, the information display unit 615b, and the information display unit 615c (for example,
The observation mode of transmission observation (to be described later) can be changed.

Next, FIG. 72 (2) shows details of the information display pattern 612. FIG. Information display pattern 61
2 is formed as a logo by the conductor pattern 612a and the blank pattern 612b, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 610 is “Kou” specified by the logo “KOH”. The conductor pattern 612a is independent from, or insulated from, the GND pattern 604. The conductor pattern 612a is composed of a planar conductor pattern surface serving as a logo base. The cut pattern 612b is on the inner side of the logo base and does not have (cut) the conductor pattern, thereby forming a logo together with the conductor pattern 612a.

As described above, when different information is written in parallel in the information display area 611, one piece of information is extracted as pattern formation information and the other information is set as conductor pattern formation information. This
The game control board 610 clarifies two different types of information.

Next, FIG. 72 (3) shows a modification of the information display pattern 612. FIG. Information display pattern 6
13 is formed as a logo by the conductor pattern 613a and the blank pattern 613b, and indicates that the manufacturer of the game control board 610 is “Kou” specified by the logo “KOH”. The conductor pattern 613a is independent of the GND pattern 604, that is, insulated.

On the other hand, the conductor pattern 613a has a via 613c and is electrically connected to the GND pattern 604a. Thereby, the conductor pattern 613a limits the property which can become a noise source. The conductor pattern 613a is desirably provided with one or more vias 613c in all of the independent conductor patterns, but may be limited to a part.

Next, a second modification (modification 2) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment. First,
73 (1) shows an information display area 622 and a GND pattern 62 that the game control board 620 has.
1 will be described. The game control board 620 is the game control board 60 of the fourth embodiment.
Compared to 0, the difference is that the information display area 622 is provided instead of the information display area 601 and the point that the GND pattern 621 is provided instead of the GND pattern 604, and the other points are the same.

The information display area 622 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 620 as a long side and a side perpendicular to the end of the game control board 620 as a short side. In the information display area 622, the short side is bisected, and the end side of the bisected area is the information display part 622a, and the inner side is the information non-display part 622b.

The information display unit 622a has an information display pattern 623 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 623 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 620 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 623 displays a manufacturer (or a sales maker) of the game control board 620.

The information non-display portion 622b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and the information display region 6
22 has a function as a gap for preventing the information display pattern 623 and the GND pattern 621 from coming close to each other on the long side of 22. Thereby, the game control board 620 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 623. Such a gaming machine 10 is easy to check the game control board 620. In addition, the game control board 620 reduces the influence of the information display pattern 623 on the GND pattern 621 as a noise source.

The GND pattern 621 includes an information display unit 621a. The information display unit 621a is connected to GND.
An information display pattern 625 for displaying information by removing the conductor pattern with the pattern 621 as a solid base is displayed. The information display pattern 625 has a game control board 620 in view of its appearance.
Displays required information about. For example, the information display pattern 625 is displayed on the game control board 6.
20 substrate management numbers are displayed. Such an information display pattern 625 is displayed on the game control board 6.
While displaying the required information about 20, it is not necessary to unnecessarily reduce the area of the GND pattern 621 on the game control board 620.

Also, in this way, when the game control board 620 writes different information side by side,
The blank pattern formation information based on the solid ND pattern 621 is used, and the other information is conductor pattern formation information. Thereby, the game control board 620 clarifies two different information categories.

The information display area 622 and the information display unit 621a may be disposed close to each other,
You may arrange | position separately. Further, the information display area 622 may be configured such that the information non-display section 622b is not required when the information display area 622 and the information display section 621a are arranged close to each other.

Next, an information display area 628 and a GND pattern 629 included in the game control board 627 will be described with reference to FIG. The game control board 620 has an information display area 628 instead of the information display area 601 as compared with the game control board 600 of the fourth embodiment,
The difference is that a GND pattern 629 is provided instead of the GND pattern 604, and the same applies to the remaining points.

The information display area 628 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 627 as a long side and a side perpendicular to the end of the game control board 627 as a short side. The information display area 628 includes an information display unit 628a.

The information display unit 628a has an information display pattern 623 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 623 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 627 from its appearance. For example, the information display pattern 623 displays a manufacturer (or a sales maker) of the game control board 620.

The GND pattern 629 includes an information display portion 629a and an information non-display portion 629b. The information display unit 629a displays an information display pattern 625 that displays information by removing the conductor pattern using the GND pattern 629 as a solid base. The information display pattern 625 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 627 from the appearance. For example, information display pattern 6
25 displays the board management number of the game control board 627. Such information display pattern 6
25, while displaying the required information regarding the game control board 627, the game control board 627
It is not necessary to unnecessarily reduce the area of the GND pattern 629 in FIG.

The information non-display portion 629b is a GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface, and the information display pattern 623 and the information display pattern 6 are arranged on the long side of the information display area 628.
25 has a function as a gap for suppressing the proximity of the two. Thereby, the game control board 627 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 623 and the information display pattern 625. Such a gaming machine 10 is easy to check the game control board 627.

Also, in this way, when the game control board 627 writes different information side by side,
The blank pattern formation information based on the solid ND pattern 629 is used, and the other information is the conductor pattern formation information. Thereby, the game control board 627 clarifies two different types of information.

The information display area 628 and the information display portion 629a may be disposed close to each other,
You may arrange | position separately. Further, the GND pattern 629 may be configured such that the information non-display portion 629b is not required when the information display region 628 and the information display portion 629a are arranged close to each other.

Next, a third modification (modification 3) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to the third modification of the fourth embodiment. The game control board 630 has a rectangular shape, and an information display area 632 is arranged at one of the four corners, for example, the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

The information display area 632 is a rectangle having a corner on the lower left corner of the game control board 630 and having a long side and a short side. The information display area 632 includes an information display portion 632a and an information non-display portion 632b based on a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed, and shares the same solid portion as the screw hole 602a.

The information display area 632 bisects the short side of the width d1 by the width d2 on the end side of the game control board 630 and the width d3 on the inner side. In the information display area 632, an end side of the divided area is an information display part 632a, and an inner side is an information non-display part 632b. The width d2 and the width d3 may be the same or different.

The information display part 632a has an information display pattern 634 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 634 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 630 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 634 displays a manufacturer (or a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 630. Information display section 6
Since 32a shares the same solid portion as the screw hole 602a, the information display unit 632a is easily found based on the screw hole 602a.

The information non-display portion 632b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and the information display area 6
32 has a function as a gap for preventing the information display pattern 634 and the GND pattern 631 from approaching each other on the long side of 32. Thereby, the game control board 630 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 634. Such a gaming machine 10 is easy to check the game control board 630. Further, the game control board 630 reduces the influence of the information display pattern 634 on the GND pattern 631 as a noise source. From this point of view, the game control board 63
For 0, it is desirable to set the information display portion 632a and the information non-display portion 632b by making the width d3 larger than the width d2.

Next, a fourth modified example (modified example 4) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front surface and a back surface of a game control board according to Modification 4 of the fourth embodiment. Note that the game control board 640 includes necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface although not shown. For example, the game control board 640 is connected to the connector 530a shown in FIGS.
, 530b, resistors 541 and 542, a processor 532, and the like are provided on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 75 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 640, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 640 has an information display area 641 (shown by hatching), a screw hole 602a and a G on the surface.
It has an ND pattern 642 (indicated by vertical line hatching).

The information display area 641 displays control board information regarding the game control board 640. The information display area 641 displays control board information by a conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 642, based on a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 641 is rectangular and is provided with one side thereof in contact with one side of the game control board 640.

The screw hole 602 a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 641. The screw hole 602a is located at the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 600 is observed with the information display area 641 on the lower side. The screw hole 602a is provided in a solid cut portion where a conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 642. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided with two sides of the lower left corner thereof in contact with two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 640.

The GND pattern 642 is a GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 642 is provided on the periphery of the information display area 641. As a result, G
The ND pattern 642 has a role of clearly showing the outer edge of the information display area 641 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 641 on the game board 640. Also,
The GND pattern 642 is provided on the peripheral edge of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the solid portion around the information display area 641 and the screw hole 602a is adjacent to the GND pattern 642, the screw hole 602a also has a role of clarifying the location of the information display area 641 on the game control board 640. In addition, the shape and size of the GND pattern 642 shown in the figure are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. The GND pattern 642 has an information display area 64.
1 or the screw hole 602a around the periphery of the solid-cut portion around the screw hole 602a, and may be more complicated or its size may spread over the entire substrate.

FIG. 75 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 640, that is, the solder surface. Game control board 6
40 has an information display back area 644 (shown in white), a screw hole 602a, and a GND pattern 643 (shown in vertical line hatching) on the back.

The information display back surface area 644 is an area corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 641. The information display back surface region 644 is a solid-cut portion having no conductor pattern. The game control board 640 allows a part of light to pass through an area having no conductor pattern, and prevents light from passing through an area having the conductor pattern. This is because the game control board 640 allows the constituent base material to partially transmit light and the conductor pattern blocks light.

Here, how the information display area 641 is viewed during observation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of how the game control board according to the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment is viewed.

FIG. 76 (1) shows how the game control board 640 is viewed in normal observation. The normal observation is an observation that relies on a light source that irradiates the surface of the game control board 640. The game control board 640 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 645 under a sufficient amount of light. On the other hand, the game control board 640 has a screw hole 602a and an information display area 64 even under an insufficient amount of light.
1 and the contrast between the GND pattern 642 and the information display area 641 can be used as a clue to identify the position of the information display pattern 645 in some cases. However, the game control board 640 may not be able to obtain the visibility of the information display pattern 645 under an insufficient amount of light such as a game hall installation environment.

FIG. 76 (2) shows how the game control board 640 is observed when the light source that irradiates the surface of the game control board 640 cannot be relied upon. The transmission observation is an observation that relies on the light source on the back side of the game control board 640, and makes the base of the information display area 641 brighter so that the contrast between the base of the information display area 641 and the conductor pattern stands out. be able to. The game control board 640 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 645 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 640 by transmission observation.

Thereby, the game control board 640 makes it easy to specify the position of the information display area 641. In addition, the game control board 640 facilitates information observation in the information display area 641. Also,
The game control board 640 enables information observation that relies on light leaking from the back side of the gaming machine 10 in a state where the ambient light is not sufficient in the game room installation environment. The game control board 640 facilitates information observation based on transmitted light not only in the game hall installation environment of the game control board 640 but also in other work environments such as an assembly process and an inspection process.

Note that the size, position, and shape of the information display area 641 and the information display back surface area 644 do not necessarily need to be completely matched. It is sufficient that the information display region 641 and the information display back surface region 644 overlap within a range where transmission observation is possible.

Next, a fifth modification (modification 5) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of an information display area according to the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment. The game control board 650 is rectangular, and information display areas 651 and 653 are arranged at one of the four corners, for example, the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

The information display area 651 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 650 as a long side and a side perpendicular to the end of the game control board 650 as a short side. The information display area 653 is a rectangle in contact with the information display area 651, with one side along the long side of the information display area 651 as a long side.
Therefore, the information display area 653 faces the end of the game control board 650 with the information display area 651 interposed therebetween. In other words, the information display area 651 is located between the end of the game control board 650 and the information display area 653.

The information display area 651 is in an area based on a solid portion having no conductor pattern.
Information display pattern 652 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern
including.

The information display area 653 is provided in the GND pattern 655. The information display area 653 is
It is a GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface, and includes an information display pattern 654 formed by printing display (for example, silk printing).

The information display patterns 652 and 654 display necessary information regarding the game control board 650 from the appearance. For example, the information display patterns 652 and 654 display a manufacturer (or a sales maker) of the game control board 650.

In this manner, the game control board 650 displays the same information in different forms by the information display patterns 652 and 654. Therefore, the game control board 650 has an information display pattern 652.
, 654, even if the visibility of one is not sufficient, it may be expected that the visibility of the other is sufficient. In addition, the game control board 650 includes information display patterns 652, 6
Even if the visibility of both of 54 is not sufficient, sufficient visibility may be expected by mutual complementation. For example, the game control board 650 visually recognizes the information display pattern 654 formed by silk printing even when the information display pattern 652 formed by the conductor pattern cannot be viewed due to insufficient light amount or light reflection. There are cases where it is possible. On the other hand, even if the game control board 650 cannot visually recognize the information display pattern 654 formed by silk printing due to insufficient light amount or light reflection, the information display pattern formed by the conductor pattern. 652 may be visible. Thus, the game control board 650
Can display information corresponding to a wider range of observation conditions by arranging information display patterns 652 and 654 having different observation performances in parallel.

In addition, as described in the fourth modification, the game control board 650 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 652 by transmission observation by removing the back surface of the information display area 651. The game control board 650 displays the same information in different forms in the information display patterns 652 and 654, but may display different information. For example, the game control board 650 displays the logo of the manufacturer of the game control board 650 in the information display area 653.
May be displayed by silk printing, and the manufacturer name of the game control board 650 may be displayed in the information display area 651 by a conductor pattern.

Next, a sixth modification (modification 6) of the information display area 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating an example of how the game control board according to the sixth modification of the fourth embodiment is viewed. FIG. 78 (1) shows how the game control board 660 is normally observed. The game control board 660 is rectangular, and information display areas 661 and 663 are arranged at one of the four corners, for example, the lower left corner where the screw hole 602a is located.

The information display area 661 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 660 as a long side and a side perpendicular to the end of the game control board 660 as a short side. The information display area 663 is a rectangle in contact with the information display area 661 with one side along the long side of the information display area 661 as a long side.
Therefore, the information display area 663 faces the end of the game control board 660 with the information display area 661 interposed therebetween. In other words, the information display area 661 is located between the end of the game control board 660 and the information display area 663.

The information display area 661 is in an area based on a solid portion having no conductor pattern.
Information display pattern 662 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern
including. The information display area 663 includes an information display pattern 664 formed by printing (for example, silk printing) in an area based on a solid portion having no conductor pattern.

The information display patterns 662 and 664 display necessary information regarding the game control board 660 from the appearance. For example, the information display patterns 662 and 664 display the manufacturer (or may be a sales manufacturer) of the game control board 660.

The normal observation of the game control board 660 is an observation that relies on a light source that irradiates the surface of the game control board 660. The game control board 660 has an information display pattern 662, under a sufficient amount of light.
Good visibility of 664 can be obtained. In addition, the game control board 660 displays the same information in different forms by the information display patterns 662 and 664. Therefore, the game control board 660 may be expected to have sufficient visibility for the other of the information display patterns 662 and 664 even when the visibility of the other is not sufficient. In addition, the game control board 66
In the case of 0, even if the visibility of both of the information display patterns 662 and 664 is not sufficient, sufficient visibility may be expected by mutual complementation. For example, the game control board 660 is
Information display pattern 662 formed by a conductor pattern due to insufficient light quantity or light reflection
In some cases, the information display pattern 664 formed by silk printing can be visually recognized even if it is not visually recognized. Conversely, even if the game control board 660 cannot visually recognize the information display pattern 664 formed by silk printing due to insufficient light quantity or light reflection, the information display pattern formed by the conductor pattern 662 may be visible. As described above, the game control board 660 has the information display patterns 662 and 66 having different observation performances.
By arranging 4 in parallel, information can be displayed in accordance with a wider viewing condition.

On the other hand, the game control board 660 has a positional relationship between the screw holes 602a and the information display areas 661 and 663, and the GND pattern 665 and the information display area 661, even under an insufficient amount of light.
In some cases, the visibility of the information display patterns 662 and 664 can be specified by using the contrast with 663 as a clue to obtain temporary visibility. However, the game control board 660 may not be able to obtain the visibility of the information display patterns 662 and 664 under an insufficient amount of light such as a game hall installation environment.

However, the game control board 660 has the information display area 661 as described in the fourth modification.
The back surface of the information display area 663 is made solid, and the back surface of the information display area 663 is made solid. FIG. 78 (2) shows how the game control board 640 looks through the transmission observation.

The transmission observation is an observation that relies on a light source on the back side of the game control board 660, and brightens the base (extracted portion) of the information display area 661 to make the contrast between the base of the information display area 661 and the conductor pattern stand out. be able to. The game control board 660 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 662 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by transmission observation.

Note that the game control board 660 cannot observe transmitted light in the information display area 663 because the back surface of the information display area 663 has a solid GND. Therefore, the game control board 660 cannot expect good visibility of the information display pattern 664 under the amount of light that passes through the game control board 660 by transmission observation. However, the game control board 660 can limit the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 660 by the GND solid on the back surface of the information display area 663. Therefore, the game control board 660 can obtain better visibility of the information display pattern 664 in normal observation as compared with the case where the back surface of the information display area 663 is removed.

Thereby, the game control board 660 makes it easy to specify the position of the information display area 661. Further, the game control board 660 facilitates information observation in the information display area 661. Also,
The game control board 660 enables information observation based on the light leaking from the back side of the gaming machine 10 in a state where the outside light is not sufficient in the game hall installation environment. The game control board 660 facilitates information observation based on transmitted light not only in the game hall installation environment of the game control board 660 but also in other work environments such as an assembly process and an inspection process.

It should be noted that the size, position, and shape of the information display area 661 and the solid portion on the back surface of the information display area 661 do not necessarily need to be completely matched. It is sufficient that the information display region 661 and the solid portion on the back surface thereof overlap in a range where transmission observation is possible.

Next, a seventh modified example (modified example 7) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating an example of the front and back surfaces of a game control board according to Modification 7 of the fourth embodiment. Note that the game control board 670 includes necessary connectors and components on a component mounting surface although not shown. For example, the game control board 670 is connected to the connector 530a shown in FIGS.
, 530b, resistors 541 and 542, a processor 532, and the like are provided on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 79A shows the surface of the game control board 670, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 670 has an information display area 671 (indicated by hatching) and screw holes 602a, 6 on the surface.
02b and a GND pattern 672 (indicated by vertical hatching).

The information display area 671 displays control board information regarding the game control board 670. The information display area 671 displays control board information with a conductor pattern formed separately from the GND pattern 672 on the basis of a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 671 is rectangular and is provided with one side thereof in contact with one side of the game control board 670. The information display area 671 is configured such that the game control board 670 has one side in contact with the game control board 670 facing down.
It is located in the lower left when observing the surface.

The screw hole 602 a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 671. The screw hole 602a is located at the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 670 is observed with the information display area 671 facing down. The screw hole 602a is provided in a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 672. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided so that the two sides of the lower left corner thereof are in contact with the two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 670.

The screw hole 602 b is one of the screw holes 602 and is located away from the information display area 671. The screw hole 602b is located at the lower right corner when the surface of the game control board 670 is observed with the information display area 671 facing down.

The GND pattern 672 is a GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 672 is provided on the periphery of the information display area 671. As a result, G
The ND pattern 672 has a role of clearly showing the outer edge of the information display area 671 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 671 on the game control board 670. Further, the GND pattern 672 is provided on the periphery of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the solid display portion around the information display area 671 and the screw hole 602a is adjacent to the GND pattern 672, the screw hole 602a is also in the information display area 671 on the game control board 670.
It has a role to clarify the whereabouts.

FIG. 79 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 670, that is, the solder surface. Game control board 6
70 is an information display area 673 (indicated by hatching) and screw holes 602a, 602 on the back surface.
b and a GND pattern 674 (indicated by vertical hatching).

The information display area 673 also displays control board information related to the game control board 670 in the same manner as the information display area 671. The information display area 673 displays the control board information by a conductor pattern that is formed so as to be separated from the GND pattern 674 on the basis of a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 673 is rectangular, and one side of the information display area 673 is a game control board 6.
70 in contact with one side. Similarly to the information display area 671, the information display area 673 is also located at the lower left when the back surface of the game control board 670 is observed with one side in contact with the game control board 670 facing down.

Thus, when the information display area 671 is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the surface (component mounting surface) of the game control board 670, the information display area 673 is displayed on the game control board 67.
It is arranged at a predetermined position (lower left) on the back surface (solder surface) of 0. That is, the game control board 670 arranges the information display area 673 on the back surface in the same positional relationship as the information display area 671 on the front surface.

Next, an eighth modification (modification 8) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the front and back surfaces of the game control board of Modification 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front surface and a back surface of a game control board according to Modification 8 of the fourth embodiment. Note that the game control board 680 includes necessary connectors and components on the component mounting surface although not shown. For example, the game control board 680 is connected to the connector 530 shown in FIG.
a, 530b, resistors 541, 542, a processor 532, and the like are provided on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 80 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 680, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 680 has an information display area 681 (indicated by hatching) and screw holes 602a, 6 on the surface.
02b and a GND pattern 682 (indicated by vertical hatching).

The information display area 681 displays control board information related to the game control board 680. The information display area 681 displays control board information by a conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 682 based on a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 681 is rectangular and is provided with one side thereof in contact with one side of the game control board 680. The information display area 681 has the game control board 680 with one side in contact with the game control board 680 facing down.
It is located in the lower left when observing the surface.

The screw hole 602 a is one of the screw holes 602 and is located in the vicinity of the information display area 681. The screw hole 602a is located at the lower left corner when the surface of the game control board 680 is observed with the information display area 681 on the lower side. The screw hole 602a is provided in a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed, and is isolated from the GND pattern 682. The solid portion around the screw hole 602a is rectangular and is provided with two sides of the lower left corner thereof in contact with two sides of the lower left corner of the game control board 680.

The screw hole 602 b is one of the screw holes 602 and is located away from the information display area 681. The screw hole 602b is located in the lower right corner when the surface of the game control board 680 is observed with the information display area 681 on the lower side.

The GND pattern 682 is a GND (GND solid) having a planar conductor pattern surface. The GND pattern 682 is provided on the periphery of the information display area 681. As a result, G
The ND pattern 682 has a role of clearly showing the outer edge of the information display area 681 formed in the solid portion and clarifying the location of the information display area 681 on the game control board 680. The GND pattern 682 is provided on the periphery of the solid portion around the screw hole 602a. Since the solid display portion around the information display area 681 and the screw hole 602a is adjacent to the GND pattern 682, the screw hole 602a is also connected to the information display area 681 on the game control board 680.
It has a role to clarify the whereabouts.

FIG. 80 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 680, that is, the solder surface. Game control board 6
Reference numeral 80 denotes an information display area 683 (indicated by hatching) and screw holes 602a, 602 on the back surface.
b and a GND pattern 684 (indicated by vertical line hatching).

The information display area 683 also displays control board information related to the game control board 680 in the same manner as the information display area 681. The information display area 683 displays control board information by a conductor pattern formed in isolation from the GND pattern 684 based on a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 683 is rectangular, and one side of the information display area 683 is a game control board 6.
80 is provided in contact with one side. The information display area 683 is a position corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 681, and is located at the lower right when the back surface of the game control board 680 is observed with one side in contact with the game control board 680 facing down.

Thus, when the information display area 681 is disposed at a predetermined position (lower left) on the surface (component mounting surface) of the game control board 680, the information display area 683 is displayed on the game control board 68.
It is disposed at a position (lower right) corresponding to the back surface of the information display area 681 on the 0 back surface (solder surface). That is, the game control board 680 arranges the information display area 683 on the back surface in a positional relationship corresponding to the information display area 681 on the front surface.

Next, the information display areas 681 and 683 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 shows the fourth
It is a figure which shows an example of the information display area of the modification 8 of this embodiment. First, the information display position in the information display area 681 will be described with reference to FIG. The information display area 681 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 680 as a long side and a side perpendicular to the end of the game control board 680 as a short side. In the information display area 681, the short side is divided into two parts, and the end side of the divided area is an information display part 681a, and the inner side is an information non-display part 681b. In addition, the width | variety of the short side divided into 2 may be the same, and may differ.

The information display unit 681a has an information display pattern 685 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 685 displays necessary information regarding the game control board 680 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 685 displays the manufacturer (or sales manufacturer) of the game control board 680.

The information non-display portion 681b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and the information display area 6
It has a function as a gap that prevents the information display pattern 685 and the GND pattern 682 from approaching each other on the long side of 81. Thereby, the game control board 680 improves the visibility of the information display pattern 685. Such a gaming machine 10 is easy to check the game control board 680.

Next, the information display position in the information display area 683 will be described with reference to FIG.
The information display area 683 is a rectangle having one side along the end of the game control board 680 as a long side and a side perpendicular to the end of the game control board 680 as a short side. In the information display area 683, the short side is divided into two parts, and the inner side of the divided area is an information display part 683a, and the end part side is the information non-display part 6
83b. That is, the back surface of the information display portion 681a is an information non-display portion 683b.
The back surface of the information display portion 683a is an information non-display portion 681b. In addition, the width | variety of the short side divided into 2 may be the same, and may differ.

The information display unit 683a has an information display pattern 686 formed by a conductor pattern independent of the peripheral conductor pattern. The information display pattern 686 displays required information regarding the game control board 680 from the appearance. For example, the information display pattern 686 displays the manufacturer (or sales manufacturer) of the game control board 680.

The information non-display portion 683b is a solid portion having no conductor pattern, and the information display area 6
It has a function as a gap for preventing the information display pattern 686 and the end portion of the game control board 680 from approaching on the long side of 81. Thereby, the game control board 680 makes it easy to specify the position of the information display pattern 686 based on the information non-display unit 683b. Such position specification is useful because the back surface of the game control board 680 is not a component mounting surface,
The gaming machine 10 can easily check the game control board 680.

Next, how the information display areas 681 and 683 are seen during transmission observation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example of how the game control board according to the eighth modification of the fourth embodiment is viewed.

A view of transmission observation of the game control board 680 useful when the light source that irradiates the surface of the game control board 680 cannot be relied upon will be described. The transmission observation is an observation that relies on the light source on the back side of the game control board 680. The bases (extracted portions) of the information display areas 681 and 683 are brightened, the bases of the information display areas 681 and 683, and the GND pattern. Contrast with the conductor patterns of 682, 684 and the information display patterns 685, 686 can be emphasized. The game control board 680 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 685 under the amount of light that passes through the game control board 680 by observation through the surface. In addition, the game control board 680 reversely displays the information display pattern 686 by transmission observation from the surface, but the presence and position of the information display pattern 686 can be shown from the surface.

Note that the game control board 680 can obtain good visibility of the information display pattern 686 under the amount of light transmitted through the game control board 680 by transmission observation from the back surface. In addition, the game control board 680 reversely displays the information display pattern 685 by transmission observation from the back side, and the presence and position of the information display pattern 685 can be shown from the back side.

Thereby, the game control board 680 makes it easy to specify the position of the information display areas 681 and 683. In addition, the game control board 680 facilitates information observation in the information display areas 681 and 683. In addition, the game control board 680 enables information observation based on light leaking from the back side of the gaming machine 10 in a state where the ambient light is not sufficient in the game hall installation environment. In addition, the game control board 680 is not limited to the game hall installation environment of the game control board 640, but an assembly process, an inspection process, etc.
In other work environments, information observation that relies on transmitted light is facilitated.

Note that the size, position, and shape of the information display areas 681, 683 are not necessarily required to be completely matched. It is sufficient that the information display areas 681 and 683 overlap in a range where transmission observation is possible. Further, the information displayed by the information display patterns 685 and 686 does not necessarily need to be the same information, and may be different information. Information display pattern 6
85 and 686 are preferably not overlapped during transmission observation, but may be partially overlapped because their presence can be easily grasped.

Next, a ninth modification (modification 9) of the game control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front surface and a back surface of a game control board according to Modification 9 of the fourth embodiment. Note that the game control board 690 includes necessary connectors and components on a component mounting surface although not shown. For example, the game control board 690 is connected to the connector 530a shown in FIGS.
, 530b, resistors 541 and 542, a processor 532, and the like are provided on the component mounting surface.

FIG. 83 (1) shows the surface of the game control board 690, that is, the component mounting surface. The game control board 690 has a surface mounting area 691 (indicated by hatching) on the surface. The surface mounting area 691 is an area where a surface mounting component is mounted on the surface of the game control board 690. Surface mount components include, for example, SOP (Small Outline Package) and QFP (Quad Flat Pac)
IC packages such as kage), chip resistors, chip capacitors, connectors, and the like.

The surface mounting region 691 is rectangular and is provided with one side thereof in contact with one side of the game control board 690. The surface mounting region 691 is located at the lower left when the surface of the game control board 690 is observed with one side in contact with the game control board 690 facing down. The surface mounting region 691 is
It may be provided without touching one side of the game control board 690.

FIG. 83 (2) shows the back surface of the game control board 690, that is, the solder surface. Game control board 6
Reference numeral 90 denotes an information display area 692 (indicated by hatching) and a GND pattern 693 (
(Shown by vertical line hatching). In the game control board 690, since the surface mounting area 691 does not have a through hole, the information display area 692 can be arranged on the back surface of the surface mounting area 691 without being damaged by the through hole.

The information display area 692 displays control board information related to the game control board 690. The information display area 692 displays control board information with a conductor pattern formed isolated from the GND pattern 693 based on a solid portion where a conductor pattern is not formed. The information display area 692 is rectangular and is provided with one side thereof in contact with one side of the game control board 690. The information display area 692 is a position corresponding to the back surface of the surface mounting area 691, and the game control board 6
When the back surface of the game control board 690 is observed with one side in contact with 90 facing down, it is located in the lower right portion.

Thus, when the surface mounting area 691 is disposed at a predetermined position (lower left) on the surface (component mounting surface) of the game control board 690, the information display area 692 is displayed on the game control board 69.
It is disposed at a position (lower right) corresponding to the back surface of the surface mounting region 691 on the 0 back surface (solder surface). That is, the game control board 690 arranges the information display area 692 on the back surface in a positional relationship corresponding to the surface mounting area 691 on the front surface.

Note that the game control board 690 may be such that a surface-mounted component is surface-mounted on the surface-mounting region 691 during non-mass production and a surface-mounted component is not mounted on the surface-mounting region 691 during mass production. Non-mass production means not at the time of mass production but at the time of development or inspection before mass production. Game control board 69
In 0, a surface mounting component (for example, a driver IC) for outputting an inspection signal at the time of development or inspection is surface mounted on the surface mounting region 691. In addition, the game control board 690 does not surface-mount the surface-mounted components in the surface-mounting region 691 during mass production, that is, operation in the market. As a result, the gaming machine 10 reduces the manufacturing cost of the game control board 690 and suppresses an illegal act based on the acquisition of the inspection signal. In addition, the game control board 690 can facilitate transmission observation of the information display area 692 when the surface mount area 691 is made a solid portion by not surface mounting the surface mount component in the surface mount area 691. .

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment (including modifications) has the following characteristics in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has conductor patterns (for example, GND patterns 604, 604a, and the like) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) that is the back surface side of the first surface.
A control board (for example, a game control board 600) capable of forming an information display pattern 605) is provided. The control board is provided with a solid portion of the conductor pattern (for example, information display area 601) in a predetermined area of the first surface, and an information display section (for example, information display section 606a) for displaying control board information regarding the control board. The peripheral conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604)
Is formed by a conductor pattern (for example, information display pattern 605) that is independent of the first and second portions of the conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604a, information display back surface region 601a) at a position corresponding to the information display portion on the second surface. (See FIGS. 70 and 71).

(2) The solid cut-out part of (1) has one side as the end of the control board, contacts the peripheral conductor pattern on the other side, and is displayed closer to the end of the control board than the peripheral conductor pattern. The part is arranged (see FIG. 71 (1)).

(3) The control board information (for example, conductor pattern 607a) of (1) or (2) is:
The solid portion (for example, GND pattern 604a, information display back surface region 601a) of the conductor pattern provided on the second surface is electrically connected to the via (for example, via 607b) (FIG. 71).
(See (3)).

(4) The gaming machine 10 has conductor patterns (for example, GND patterns 642 and 643) on the first surface (for example, the front surface) and the second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 640) that can be formed is provided. The control board is provided with a solid portion of the conductor pattern (for example, an information display area 641) in a predetermined area of the first surface, and the information display section for displaying the control board information regarding the control board is used as a peripheral conductor pattern (for example,
Conductor pattern (for example, information display pattern 645) independent of GND pattern 642).
) And a solid pattern portion (for example, information display back surface region 644) of the conductor pattern is provided on the second surface at a position corresponding to the information display portion (see FIGS. 75 and 76).

(5) The information display part of (4) is used as a peripheral conductor pattern (for example, a GND pattern 642).
) (FIG. 76 (1)).

(6) The gaming machine 10 has conductor patterns (for example, GND patterns 682 and 684) on the first surface (for example, the front surface) and the second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 680) that can be formed is provided. The control board is provided with a solid portion of the conductor pattern in a predetermined area of the first surface (for example, the lower left corner when the game control board 680 is observed from the surface in a predetermined direction), and control board information relating to the control board Forming a first information display portion (for example, information display region 681) for displaying a conductor pattern,
A position corresponding to the first information display unit on the second surface (for example, the back side of the lower left corner when the game control board 680 is observed from the surface in a predetermined direction, that is, the game control board 680 is set in the predetermined direction. In the lower right corner when observed from the back surface), a solid portion of the conductor pattern is provided, and a second information display portion (for example, information display region 683) for displaying control board information related to the control board is formed by the conductor pattern. (See FIG. 80).

(7) The gaming machine 10 has conductor patterns (for example, GND patterns 672, 674) on the first surface (for example, the front surface) and the second surface (for example, the back surface) that is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 670) that can be formed is provided. The control board is provided with a solid portion of the conductor pattern in a predetermined region of the first surface (for example, the lower left corner when the game control board 670 is observed from the surface in a predetermined direction), and control board information relating to the control board Forming a first information display portion (for example, information display region 671) that displays
A solid pattern is provided on the second surface corresponding to the first information display unit (for example, the lower left corner when the game control board 670 is observed from the back with the predetermined direction), A second information display section (for example, information display area 673) that displays control board information related to the control board is formed of a conductor pattern (see FIG. 79).

(8) The gaming machine 10 can form a conductor pattern (for example, the GND pattern 693) on the first surface (for example, the front surface) and the second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. A control board (for example, a game control board 690). The control board is provided with a predetermined surface (for example, a surface mounting region 691) on the first surface where a predetermined surface mounting component (for example, an IC package (SOP)) is mounted during non-mass production and a surface mounting component is not mounted during mass production. An information display unit (for example, information display area 692) for displaying control board information related to the control board
Is formed by a conductor pattern at a position corresponding to a predetermined area (for example, the back side of the surface mounting area 691) (see FIG. 83).

(9) The gaming machine 10 has a conductor pattern (for example, a GND pattern 604, an information display pattern) on a first surface (for example, the front surface) and a second surface (for example, the back surface) which is the back surface side of the first surface. 612, 613, 614) can be formed control board (for example, game control board 610)
). The control board adjoins first control board information (for example, information displayed on the information display unit 615a) and second control board information (for example, information displayed on the information display unit 615b) related to the control board. When displaying, either one of the first control board information and the second control board information is displayed by a conductor pattern (for example, information display pattern 613) formed in a solid portion of the conductor pattern, and the other is a conductor. A blank pattern (for example, information display pattern 612) formed on the solid portion of the pattern is displayed (see FIG. 72).

(10) When displaying the first control board information and the second control board information in (9) on the first surface, the first control board information and the second control board are the second surface. A region corresponding to one of the information is defined as a solid portion of the conductor pattern, and a region corresponding to the other is defined as a solid portion of the conductor pattern (see FIGS. 72 and 78).

(11) The first control board information and the second control board information of (9) or (10) are both conductor patterns (for example, information display patterns) independent from the peripheral conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 604). 612, 613) (see FIG. 72).

(12) The gaming machine 10 has a first surface (for example, a front surface) and a second surface that is the back surface side of the first surface.
The control board (for example, game control board 620) which can form a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 621, information display pattern 623) is provided on the surface (for example, back). The control board includes an information display unit for displaying control board information related to the control board, the first surface and the second surface.
The ground plane of at least one of the surfaces (for example, the GND pattern 604)
) Is displayed by a blank pattern (for example, information display pattern 625) formed in FIG.
3).

(13) The gaming machine 10 has a first surface (for example, a front surface) and a second surface that is the back surface side of the first surface.
The control board (for example, game control board 650) which can form a conductor pattern (for example, GND pattern 655, information display pattern 652) on the surface (for example, back surface) is provided. The control board provides control board information related to the control board in a first form (for example, a conductor pattern).
The first information display section (for example, information display pattern 652) to be displayed in (2) and the second information display section (for example, silk printing) for displaying the control board information in a second form (for example, silk printing) different from the first form.
For example, the information display pattern 654) is included (see FIG. 77).

(14) The first information display unit and the second information display unit of (13) are arranged in parallel (see FIG. 77).
The above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. The program describing the processing contents can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. As a computer-readable recording medium, a magnetic storage device,
There are optical disks, magneto-optical recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -RO
M / RW (ReWritable). For magneto-optical recording media, MO (Magneto-Optical disk)
Etc.

When distributing the program, for example, the DVD or C on which the program is recorded
A portable recording medium such as a D-ROM is sold. It is also possible to store the program in a storage device of a server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via a network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. In addition, each time a program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program.

In addition, at least a part of the processing functions described above is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as vice).

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls and slot machines that are medals.

The disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims,
It is intended that all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the terms of the claims are included.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Game machine 41 Display apparatus 100 Game control apparatus 300 Effect control apparatus

Claims (1)

Comprising a substrate capable of forming a conductor pattern on the first surface and the second surface which is the back side of the first surface;
The substrate includes an information display unit that displays substrate information about the substrate,
The information display part is formed by a conductor pattern independent of a peripheral conductor pattern.
Gaming machine.

Images